WO2022206363A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022206363A1
WO2022206363A1 PCT/CN2022/080766 CN2022080766W WO2022206363A1 WO 2022206363 A1 WO2022206363 A1 WO 2022206363A1 CN 2022080766 W CN2022080766 W CN 2022080766W WO 2022206363 A1 WO2022206363 A1 WO 2022206363A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
sssg
terminal device
time
network device
time required
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/080766
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
黄雯雯
铁晓磊
张战战
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022206363A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022206363A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/06Reselecting a communication resource in the serving access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0248Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal dependent on the time of the day, e.g. according to expected transmission activity
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
  • the user equipment monitors the physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel) according to the configuration of the search space set (search space set, SS set) during the DRX activation time.
  • downlink control channel, PDCCH downlink control channel
  • the UE no longer monitors the PDCCH, thereby saving the power consumption of the UE.
  • a dynamic search space set group (SSSG) switching scheme is introduced.
  • the solution includes: dividing multiple SS sets pre-configured to the UE into multiple SSSGs, and each SSSG includes one or more SS sets.
  • the UE can switch between different SSSGs. For example, in a possible implementation manner, before the UE receives the handover command, the UE monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set included in the SSSG1. Subsequently, when the UE receives the handover command, the UE will stop monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, and switch to monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set included in SSSG2.
  • the UE Before the introduction of SSSG, at the activation time of DRX, the UE needs to monitor the PDCCH according to all the configured SS sets on the activation bandwidth part (BWP). set, monitor the PDCCH, thereby saving the power consumption of the UE. How to switch between different SSSGs is a technical problem to be solved in the embodiments of the present application.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus for switching between different SSSGs.
  • a communication method comprising: at an activation time of a first DRX cycle, a terminal device operates in a first SSSG; and from an inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the first DRX cycle The terminal device is handed over from the first SSSG to the second SSSG before the time used for WUS within the inactive time.
  • the second SSSG includes a search space set for monitoring the WUS, and at the inactive time of the first DRX, the terminal device monitors the WUS according to the search space set.
  • the terminal device can switch to the second SSSG during the inactive time of the DRX cycle, and the second SSSG can include a search space for monitoring the WUS, so that the UE can switch to the second SSSG during the inactive time of the DRX cycle.
  • the WUS can be monitored, and the WUS can realize its function and save the power consumption of the UE.
  • the second SSSG is defined by a protocol or configured by a network device.
  • the above-mentioned second SSSG may be defined by a protocol or configured by a network device, and may be considered as a pre-configured default SSSG.
  • the terminal device directly switches to the above-mentioned default second SSSG, the terminal device does not need to make a judgment, and the power consumption of the terminal device is saved.
  • the second SSSG includes a set of search spaces only for listening to the WUS.
  • the above-mentioned second SSSG may be a specific SSSG, and the specific SSSG only includes a search space set for monitoring the WUS, and does not include other types of search space sets.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives configuration information from a network device, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG; the terminal device determines the second SSSG, and the determined The second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
  • a second aspect provides a communication method, and the beneficial effects of the second aspect can be found in the first aspect, including: at the activation time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle, the network device determines that the terminal device operates in the first search space set Group SSSG; from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the time for monitoring the wake-up signal WUS within the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, the network device determines that the terminal device is operated by the first SSSG Switch to the second SSSG.
  • the method further includes: the second SSSG includes a search space set for monitoring WUS, and at the inactive time of the first DRX, the network device performs the search according to the search space set, send the WUS.
  • the second SSSG is defined by a protocol, or determined by the network device.
  • the second SSSG includes a search space set only for monitoring WUS.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG, and the second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
  • a communication method comprising: a terminal device receiving configuration information of a search space set for monitoring a wake-up signal WUS from a network device, where the configuration information of the search space set includes a search space set group for determining a search space set.
  • the configuration information of the SSSG, or the configuration information of the search space set does not include the configuration information for determining the SSSG; during the inactive time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle, the terminal works in any SSSG, The terminal device monitors the WUS according to the search space set.
  • the SSSG associated with the search space set used for monitoring WUS is not limited.
  • the UE can monitor the search space set according to the above search space set for monitoring WUS. WUS, so that the UE can monitor the WUS during the inactive time, saving the power consumption of the UE.
  • a communication method including: a terminal device determining an SSSG to be switched to;
  • the terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, where the type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG, and the empty SSSG means that there is no physical downlink control channel in the SSSG PDCCH monitoring timing or candidate PDCCH; the terminal device switches to the SSSG according to the time required for switching to the SSSG.
  • the UE considers the type of the SSSG to be switched to, and determines that the time required for switching the SSSG is different, so that the effective delay can meet the requirements of different scenarios and improve the system performance.
  • the terminal device determines the SSSG to be switched to, and the time required for switching to the SSSG refers to the time when the terminal device satisfies the first condition. the interval between the time and the time when the terminal device switches to the SSSG;
  • the first condition includes: the terminal device receives downlink control information DCI from the network device, where the DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or, the terminal device according to the SSSG before switching
  • the duration of monitoring the PDCCH in the search space set in the SSSG reaches the first duration; or, the terminal device monitors the DCI according to the search space set in the SSSG before handover.
  • the terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, including: the type of the SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, and the first condition is the
  • the terminal device receives the DCI from the network device, and the terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH scheduled by the DCI; or,
  • the type of the SSSG is an empty SSSG, and the terminal device determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG according to the correspondence between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, or the time required for the handover to the SSSG
  • the time is predefined by the protocol or configured by the network device.
  • the terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI, including: the terminal device according to the hybrid automatic repeat request corresponding to the PDSCH
  • the time unit offset fed back by HARQ determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG; or the terminal device determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG according to the time unit offset of the scheduled PUSCH time.
  • the terminal device switching to the SSSG according to the time required for switching to the SSSG includes: when or after the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied, Regardless of whether the HARQ feedback is a positive acknowledgment or a negative acknowledgment, the terminal device switches to the SSSG; or, when the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied or after, when the HARQ feedback is a positive acknowledgment , the terminal device switches to the SSSG.
  • the first subcarrier spacing is the subcarrier spacing of the bandwidth part BWP activated when the terminal device satisfies the first condition.
  • the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter; or, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter and the It is determined by the larger value of the minimum scheduling offset value indicated by the network device for scheduling the PDSCH.
  • a fifth aspect provides a communication method.
  • a network device determining a search space set group SSSG to which a terminal device is to be switched; Type, to determine the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG, the type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG, and the empty SSSG means that there is no physical downlink control channel PDCCH monitoring opportunity or candidate in the SSSG PDCCH; the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG according to the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG.
  • the network device determines the SSSG to which the terminal device is to be switched, and the time required for switching to the SSSG means that the terminal device satisfies the The interval between the time of the second condition and the time when the terminal device switches to the SSSG;
  • the second condition includes: the network device sends downlink control information DCI to the terminal device, where the DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or, the network device determines that the terminal device The duration that the device monitors the PDCCH according to the search space set in the SSSG before the handover reaches the first duration; or, the network device sends the DCI through the SSSG before the handover.
  • the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, including: the type of the SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, the second The condition is that the network device sends DCI to the terminal device, and the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or physical uplink shared channel PUSCH scheduled by the DCI ; Or, the type of the SSSG is an empty SSSG, and the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the correspondence between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, and the time parameter is used for determining the time for switching to the SSSG; or, the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is predefined by a protocol or determined by a network device.
  • the network device determines, according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI, the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG, including: the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the PDSCH The time unit offset of the automatic retransmission request HARQ feedback determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or the network device determines the terminal device according to the time unit offset of the scheduled PUSCH The time required to switch to the SSSG.
  • the network device determining, according to the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG, determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG, including: after the terminal device switches to the SSSG At or after the time required for the SSSG, regardless of whether the HARQ feedback received by the network device from the terminal device is a positive confirmation or a negative confirmation, the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG; or, at When the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is satisfied or after, when the HARQ feedback received by the network device from the terminal device is a positive confirmation, the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG. the SSSG.
  • the first subcarrier spacing is the subcarrier spacing of the bandwidth part BWP activated by the terminal device when the network device satisfies the second condition.
  • the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter; or, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter and the It is determined by the larger value of the minimum scheduling offset value indicated by the network device for scheduling the PDSCH.
  • an apparatus comprising a unit for implementing any one of the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fourth aspect.
  • an apparatus comprising a unit for implementing the above-mentioned second aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • a device comprising a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit to the processor or send signals from the processor to the
  • the processor is used to implement the method in the implementation manner of any one of the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fourth aspect by using a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
  • a ninth aspect provides a device comprising a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit to the processor or send signals from the processor to the For other communication devices other than the communication device, the processor is used to implement the method in the implementation manner of the foregoing second aspect or the fifth aspect by using a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
  • a system comprising the apparatus of the aforementioned sixth aspect or the eighth aspect, and the aforementioned apparatus of the seventh aspect or the ninth aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, and a computer program or instruction is stored in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer program or instruction is executed, any of the foregoing first to fifth aspects is realized.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a computer program product comprising instructions that, when executed, implement the method in the implementation of any one of the foregoing first to fifth aspects.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a circuit system, the circuit system includes a processor, and may further include a memory, for implementing the method of any one of the foregoing first to fifth aspects.
  • the circuitry may consist of chips or may contain chips and other discrete devices.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 2a, Fig. 2b, Fig. 2c and Fig. 2d are schematic diagrams of a protocol stack provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a DRX mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a DRX cycle provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the DRX mechanism of the UE downlink service provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a PDCCH-based WUS provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a DCI-based PDCCH skipping scheme provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 Figure 9 and Figure 10 are schematic diagrams of dynamic SSSG switching provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 11 and 12 are schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by Embodiment 1 of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of SSSG handover provided by Embodiment 1 of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the communication method provided by Embodiment 2 of the present application.
  • 16 is a schematic diagram of an effective delay of SSSG handover provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by Embodiment 3 of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 1 is a network architecture to which this embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • a terminal device such as terminal 1301 or terminal 1302
  • the wireless network includes a radio access network (RAN) and a core network (core network, CN), wherein the RNA is used to access the terminal equipment to the wireless network, and the CN is used to manage the terminal equipment and provide The gateway for external network communication.
  • RAN radio access network
  • core network core network
  • the terminal equipment, RAN and CN involved in FIG. 1 will be described in detail below.
  • Terminal devices include devices that provide voice and/or data connectivity to users, and may include, for example, handheld devices with wireless connectivity, or processing devices connected to a wireless modem.
  • the terminal equipment may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN.
  • RAN radio access network
  • the terminal equipment may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device (D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle to everything (V2X) terminal equipment , Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber) station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user Agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • M2M/MTC Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications
  • IoT Internet of things
  • subscriber unit subscriber unit
  • subscriber station subscriber station
  • mobile station mobile station
  • remote station remote station
  • access point AP
  • remote terminal remote terminal
  • access terminal access terminal
  • the RAN may include one or more RAN devices, such as RAN device 1101 and RAN device 1102 .
  • the interface between the RAN device and the terminal device may be a Uu interface (or called an air interface).
  • Uu interface or called an air interface.
  • the names of these interfaces may remain unchanged, or may be replaced with other names, which are not limited in this application.
  • a RAN device is a node or device that accesses a terminal device to a wireless network, and the RAN device may also be referred to as a network device or a base station.
  • RAN equipment includes but is not limited to: a new generation base station (generation Node B, gNB) in a 5G communication system, an evolved node B (evolved node B, eNB) transmission and reception point ( transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting point (transmitting point, TP), etc.
  • the communication between the RAN equipment and the terminal equipment follows the protocol layer structure defined by the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) organization.
  • the control plane protocol layer structure may include radio resource control (RRC) Layer, packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer, radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical layer and other protocol layer functions
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RLC radio link control
  • media access control media access control
  • MAC media access control
  • the user plane protocol layer structure may include the functions of the protocol layers such as the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the physical layer.
  • the PDCP layer may also include a service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol) , SDAP) layer.
  • service data adaptation protocol service data adaptation protocol
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • FIG. 2a a schematic diagram of downlink data transmission between layers is shown.
  • the downward arrow in FIG. 2a indicates data transmission, and the upward arrow indicates data reception.
  • the PDCP layer After the PDCP layer obtains data from the upper layer, it will transmit the data to the RLC layer and the MAC layer, and then the MAC layer will generate a transport block, and then wirelessly transmit it through the physical layer.
  • the data is encapsulated correspondingly in each layer.
  • the data received by a certain layer from the upper layer of the layer is regarded as the service data unit (SDU) of the layer. After layer encapsulation, it becomes a PDU, and then passed to the lower layer. a layer.
  • SDU service data unit
  • the terminal device also has an application layer and a non-access layer; wherein, the application layer can be used to provide services to applications installed in the terminal device, for example, the terminal device receives Downlink data can be sequentially transmitted from the physical layer to the application layer, and then provided by the application layer to the application program; for another example, the application layer can obtain the data generated by the application program, transmit the data to the physical layer in turn, and send it to other communication devices.
  • the non-access layer can be used for forwarding user data, for example, forwarding the uplink data received from the application layer to the SDAP layer or forwarding the downlink data received from the SDAP layer to the application layer.
  • a RAN device may include a CU and a DU, and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU.
  • an interface between a CU and a DU may be referred to as an F1 interface, wherein a control plane (control panel, CP) interface may be an F1-C, and a user plane (user panel, UP) interface may be an F1-U.
  • the CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network: for example, as shown in Figure 2b, the functions of the PDCP layer and above are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP layer (for example, the RLC layer and the MAC layer, etc.) are set in the DU; For another example, as shown in FIG. 2c, the functions of the protocol layers above the PDCP layer are set in the CU, and the functions of the PDCP layer and the following protocol layers are set in the DU.
  • the functions of the CU may be implemented by one entity, or may also be implemented by different entities.
  • the functions of the CU can be further divided, that is, the control plane and the user plane can be separated and implemented by different entities, namely the control plane CU entity (ie the CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity. (ie CU-UP entity).
  • the CU-CP entity and the CU-UP entity can be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the functions of the RAN device.
  • One or more CN devices may be included in the CN.
  • the CN may include access and mobility management function (AMF) network elements, session management function (SMF) network elements, and user plane functions (user plane functions).
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • SMF session management function
  • user plane functions user plane functions
  • UPF access and mobility management function
  • Policy control function policy control function
  • PCF policy control function
  • UDM unified data management
  • application function application function, AF
  • each device in the communication system shown in FIG. 1 is only for illustration, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this. In practical applications, the communication system may also include more terminal devices and more RAN devices. Other devices may also be included.
  • the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 above can be applied to communication systems of various radio access technologies (RATs), such as 4G (or LTE) communication systems, or 5G (or 5G (or referred to as LTE) communication systems.
  • RATs radio access technologies
  • the new radio (NR) communication system can also be a transition system between the LTE communication system and the 5G communication system.
  • 6G communication system 6G communication system.
  • the network architecture and service scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and do not constitute limitations on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the evolution of the network architecture and the emergence of new service scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
  • PDCCH Physical downlink control channel
  • One of the functions of the PDCCH is to carry the scheduling information of uplink or downlink data, and the UE can periodically monitor the PDCCH to obtain the scheduling information. If it is detected that the PDCCH has scheduling information, for the downlink scheduling information, the UE can determine the resource location of the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) according to the scheduling information to receive the data carried on the PDSCH. Scheduling information to determine the resource location of the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) to send data carried on the PUSCH.
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • the base station may configure at least one search space set (SS set) for the UE.
  • the UE performs PDCCH monitoring based on the SS set. Specifically, the UE performs PDCCH monitoring according to the parameters of the SS set.
  • the configuration information of each SS set includes at least one of the following parameters:
  • control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) associated with the SS set;
  • CORESET represents a time-frequency resource set used to carry PDCCH
  • a CORESET consists of several continuous or discontinuous resources in the frequency domain It is composed of a resource block (RB), which is composed of one or more consecutive symbols in the time domain.
  • the UE can perform PDCCH monitoring on the CORESET associated with the SS set according to the parameters of the SS set, such as the monitoring period, offset or monitoring pattern, etc.
  • the value unit of Ks and Os may be a time slot (slot) in NR.
  • - In-slot PDCCH monitoring pattern (pattern), or referred to as intra-slot PDCCH monitoring symbol, used to indicate the start symbol of the CORESET associated with the SS set in a certain time slot for monitoring PDCCH.
  • Ts used to indicate the number of consecutive time slots in which the SS set exists.
  • Ts is less than Ks, and the value of Ts may be one time slot.
  • the base station will also configure the DCI format (format) monitored at the position of the candidate PDCCH, for example, DCI format 0_0, DCI format 1_0, DCI format 2_0, DCI format 2_1, DCI format 2_2, DCI format 2_3, DCI format 2_4, DCI format 2_5, or DCI format 2_6, etc.
  • DCI format format monitored at the position of the candidate PDCCH
  • the base station will also configure the DCI format monitored at the position of the candidate PDCCH, for example, DCI format 0_0, DCI format 1_0, DCI format 0_1, DCI format 1_1, DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_2, DCI format 3_0, or DCI format 3_1, etc.
  • the UE may monitor the PDCCH period, offset, and
  • the PDCCH monitoring pattern in the time slot, etc. determines the PDCCH monitoring occasion (MO).
  • the PDCCH monitoring period in a certain SS set parameter is 4 time slots
  • the offset is 0, and the duration is 1 time slot.
  • the number of symbols of the CORESET associated with set is 1 symbol.
  • the UE uses 4 time slots as the PDCCH monitoring period, and performs PDCCH monitoring on the CORESET associated with the SS set.
  • the PDCCH is monitored according to the following scheme: Since the offset is 0, it can be determined that PDCCH monitoring is performed in the first time slot in each PDCCH monitoring period, and the duration is 1 time slot, which can be determined PDCCH monitoring is performed only in the first time slot in each PDCCH monitoring period.
  • the UE can have three monitoring opportunities in each PDCCH monitoring period, that is, the PDCCH monitoring is performed in the first three symbols of the first time slot.
  • the PDCCH monitoring timing determined according to the above-mentioned SS set parameters, please refer to the black filled part in FIG. 3 .
  • the PDCCH monitoring timing is relatively dense, for example, the PDCCH monitoring period is 1 time slot, the UE must monitor the PDCCH in each time slot. Once there is data transmission, the base station can quickly schedule the UE, which is conducive to reducing the The transmission delay of the service, but the frequent monitoring of the PDCCH by the UE will lead to waste of the power consumption of the UE. If the PDCCH monitoring timing is sparse, for example, the PDCCH monitoring period is relatively long, the power consumption of the UE can be reduced, but the service transmission delay will be increased.
  • a common way to save UE power consumption is to use continuous discontinuous reception (connected mode discontinuous reception, C-DRX), which can be referred to as DRX for short.
  • C-DRX connected mode discontinuous reception
  • the DRX mechanism can control the behavior of the UE to monitor the PDCCH. If there is no DRX mechanism, the UE will always monitor the PDCCH to detect whether there is indication information from the base station. In reality, however, in many cases, the UE does not always interact with the base station for effective information, does not always perform uplink or download services, and does not always transmit voice data during a call. If there is no data interaction between the UE and the base station, the UE continues to monitor the PDCCH, which obviously consumes electricity.
  • DRX a mechanism designed to save UE power.
  • the UE can periodically enter the sleep mode (sleep mode) at certain times.
  • the UE does not need to continuously monitor the PDCCH.
  • the latency is controlled within an acceptable user experience range, it makes sense to perform DRX to save power.
  • the UE can periodically monitor the PDCCH according to the DRX cycle configured by the base station.
  • the DRX cycle consists of two time periods, active time and non-active time.
  • the UE is in an awake state and monitors the PDCCH.
  • the UE is in a dormant state and does not monitor the PDCCH to reduce power consumption.
  • the dormant state is only for monitoring the PDCCH, indicating that the UE does not monitor the PDCCH.
  • the UE in the dormant state is still in the RRC connected state and can communicate with the base station on the Uu air interface.
  • the UE does not monitor all PDCCHs.
  • the PDCCH that the UE does not monitor includes at least the cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), and the cancellation indication-radio network temporary identifier (CI) -RNTI), configuration scheduling wireless network temporary identifier (configured scheduled-radio network temporary identifier, CS-RNTI), preemption indication wireless network temporary identifier (Indication pre-emption-radio network temporary identifier, INT-RNTI), time slot format indication Wireless network temporary identifier (slot format indicator--radio network temporary identifier, SFI-RNTI), semi-permanent activation of CSI wireless network temporary identifier (activation of Semi-persistent CSI-radio network temporary identifier, SP-CSI-RNTI), PUCCH power control Wireless network temporary identifier (PUCCH power control-radio network temporary identifier, TPC-PUCC
  • the monitoring of only the PDCCH scrambled by the above-mentioned RNTI is constrained by the DRX mechanism, and the monitoring of the PDCCH scrambled by other RNTIs is not constrained by the DRX mechanism.
  • a discontinuous reception activation timer (drx-onDurationTimer) may be set, and when the drx-onDurationTimer is running, the UE is in the activation time.
  • DRX discontinuous reception activation timer
  • the DRX mechanism introduces a timer: drx-InactivityTimer.
  • the UE monitors and receives a PDCCH for scheduling new data, the UE starts (or restarts) the timer drx-InactivityTimer.
  • the UE will continue to monitor the PDCCH while the drx-InactivityTimer is running until the timer expires. It can be seen that the introduction of the drx-InactivityTimer can ensure that the UE is in the active time during the operation of the drx-InactivityTimer, and receives the scheduling of the next base station, which is equivalent to extending the "active time”. If the UE continuously receives the PDCCH for scheduling new data, the UE will continuously restart the drx-InactivityTimer, which may cause the UE to be in the "active time” throughout the DRX cycle, that is, the "active time” may extend to the entire DRX cycle.
  • the base station may also send a media access control (media access control, MAC) control element (control element, CE) to the UE to terminate the drx in advance during the running of the drx-Inactivity Timer - Timing of the Inactivity Timer.
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • the UE After receiving the MAC CE signaling, the UE ends the timing of the remaining drx-Inactivty Timer to save power consumption.
  • the termination of the drx-Inactivity Timer by the MAC CE signaling can be considered as a way to make the UE enter the sleep state in advance, so the power consumption of the UE can be saved, but the scheduling delay may be increased.
  • discontinuous reception round trip timer (drx-HARQ-RTT Timer, hybrid automatic repeat request-round trip time, HARQ-RTT) and discontinuous reception retransmission timer (drx-Retransmission Timer).
  • a possible HARQ working mode is: the base station decides whether to retransmit downlink data according to the HARQ feedback .
  • the HARQ feedback can be a negative acknowledgment (NACK) or an acknowledgment (ACK). For example, if the HARQ feedback of the downlink data a is NACK, after receiving the NACK, the base station retransmits the downlink data a, and issues resources for scheduling the retransmission of the downlink data a on the PDCCH.
  • NACK negative acknowledgment
  • ACK acknowledgment
  • the UE When the HARQ feedback of the downlink data a sent by the UE to the base station is NACK, the UE then needs to receive the PDCCH for scheduling the retransmission of the downlink data a sent by the base station.
  • drx-HARQ-RTT Timer and drx-Retransmission Timer are introduced.
  • the UE starts the drx-HARQ-RTT Timer when sending HARQ feedback to the base station using the PUCCH resource.
  • the drx-HARQ-RTT Timer When the drx-HARQ-RTT Timer times out, and the UE fails to decode the data, that is, when the HARQ feedback sent by the UE is NACK, the drx-Retransmission Timer is started. During the operation of the drx-Retransmission Timer, the UE is in the activation time and monitors the PDCCH, thus avoiding that the UE has to wait until the "activation time" of the next DRX cycle before it can monitor the PDCCH and reduce the transmission delay of retransmitted data.
  • drx-HARQ-RTT Timer for downlink services and uplink services, drx-HARQ-RTT Timer and drx-Retransmission Timer can be set respectively.
  • the timers of downlink services may be called drx-HARQ-RTT TimerDL and drx-Retransmission TimerDL.
  • Its working process can be: when the UE sends the HARQ feedback of the downlink service, the drx-HARQ-RTT TimerDL is turned on, and when the downlink service decoding fails, that is, when the sent HARQ feedback is NACK, the drx-Retransmission TimerDL is turned on, and the drx-Retransmission TimerDL is turned on.
  • the UE is in active time.
  • the timers for uplink services are called drx-HARQ-RTT TimerUL and drx-Retransmission TimerUL.
  • the working process can be as follows: after the UE sends the PUSCH, the drx-HARQ-RTT TimerUL is turned on, the drx-HARQ-RTT TimerUL times out, and the drx-Retransmission TimerUL is turned on. During the operation of the drx-Retransmission TimerUL, the UE is in the activation time.
  • the processing flow of the UE in the DRX mechanism includes: the UE monitors the PDCCH during the running of the drx-onDurationTimer timer.
  • drx-InactivityTimer will not be started, then after the end of drx-onDurationTimer, the UE enters the sleep state, that is, non-active time, and does not monitor the PDCCH; if the UE detects the newly transmitted PDSCH scheduled by the PDCCH, it will start or restart the drx-InactivityTimer, that is, whenever the UE When the first transmitted data is scheduled, the drx-InactivityTimer is started (or restarted) once, and the UE will remain in the active time until the timer expires, and the UE monitors the PDCCH during the operation of the drx-InactivityTimer.
  • the UE receives the PDSCH according to the received scheduling information, the UE feeds back the HARQ information, and starts the drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL of the HARQ process. After the drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL ends, if the UE does not receive the PDSCH correctly, the feedback When the HARQ information is NACK, the drx-RetransmissionTimerDL is enabled, and the UE monitors the PDCCH in the drx-RetransmissionTimerDL. When the UE detects the DCI scheduling the PDSCH, the UE will terminate the drx-RetransmissionTimerDL regardless of whether the drx-RetransmissionTimerDL times out.
  • timers when the UE is in the active time, that is, the wake-up state, at least one of the following timers is running: drx-onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimerDL, or drx-RetransmisionTimerUL, etc.
  • drx-onDurationTimer when the UE is in the active time, that is, the wake-up state, at least one of the following timers is running: drx-onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimerDL, or drx-RetransmisionTimerUL, etc.
  • Table 1 the functions of the above timers are described, as shown in Table 1 below.
  • the activation time of the DRX mechanism may also include at least one of the following running periods:
  • the timer is used for conflict resolution in the random access process
  • the message B response window is used for 2-step (2-step) random access conflict resolution;
  • the UE has not received a PDCCH indicating a new transmission after successfully receiving a random access response (random access response, RAR) based on non-contention random access.
  • RAR random access response
  • a wake up signal is introduced on the basis of the DRX mechanism, that is, before the activation timer (drx-on duration Timer) of the DRX is started, the base station can send a message to the UE. WUS to inform the UE whether to start the drx-on duration Timer.
  • the UE monitors the WUS within a time window before the drx-on Duration Timer starts (this time window may be referred to as the WUS time window). If the WUS indicating wake-up is monitored, the UE will start the activation timer drx-on duration Timer, and perform normal operations in the active period timer, including monitoring the PDCCH; when the UE detects the WUS indicating no wake-up, the UE will Not starting the drx-on duration Timer means that the UE device will not monitor the PDCCH in the next DRX cycle, so as to save energy.
  • the UE may determine the WUS time window according to the minimum time offset (minimum offset) and the PS-offset.
  • the above-mentioned minimum time offset is sent by the UE to the base station, and refers to the time length from the end position of the WUS time window to the start position of the drx-on Duration Timer
  • the above-mentioned PS-offset is sent by the base station to the UE, which refers to the WUS The length of time from the start of the time window to the start of the drx-on Duration Timer.
  • WUS is carried by DCI in formats 2-6, and the DCI can be scrambled by using a power saving-radio network temporary identifier (PS-RNTI).
  • PS-RNTI power saving-radio network temporary identifier
  • the DCI of DCI formats 2-6 can carry multiple WUSs, and each WUS can occupy one field (the field occupies at least 1 bit).
  • a WUS may indicate whether one or more UEs are awake. In other words, multiple UEs can reuse the same WUS.
  • DCI based PDCCH skipping scheme DCI based PDCCH skipping scheme
  • the solution is still in the research stage, and its core idea is that the base station instructs the UE to stop monitoring the PDCCH in the next time period through the PDCCH, so as to save the power consumption of the UE.
  • the time period during which the PDCCH is not detected may be several time slots, several milliseconds, or the time corresponding to the remaining inactivity Timer.
  • This solution can make the UE sleep for a short time, which not only achieves the purpose of saving power consumption, but also reduces the impact on the delay as much as possible.
  • the UE may no longer monitor the PDCCH within a certain period of time. After the period ends, the UE continues to monitor the PDCCH.
  • the base station may configure multiple candidate time periods to the UE through RRC signaling for not monitoring the PDCCH, and subsequently use the PDCCH to indicate one of the multiple candidate time periods.
  • the PDCCH that the UE does not monitor includes at least one of the following PDCCH scrambled by RNTI: C-RNTI, modulation and coding mode cell Wireless network temporary identification (modulation and coding scheme-C-RNTI, MCS-C-RNTI), CS-RNTI, SP-CSI-RNTI, CI-RNTI, INT-RNTI, SFI-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC -PUSCH-RNTI, TPC-SRS-RNTI, or AI-RNTI, etc.
  • the base station can configure multiple SS sets for one BWP, and can divide the SS sets in one BWP into multiple groups. As shown in FIG. 8 , taking the division into two groups as an example, the two groups are SSSG1 and SSSG2 respectively.
  • the UE can switch between different SSSGs. For example, the UE first monitors the PDCCH by using the above-mentioned SSSG1.
  • SSSG1 includes SS set1 and SS set2, and the UE can monitor the PDCCH according to the parameters configured by SS set1 and SS set2.
  • the UE After receiving the handover command, the UE switches from SSSG1 to SSSG2, then the UE stops monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, and then starts monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG2.
  • SSSG2 includes SS set3 and SS set4. Then when the UE receives the handover command, it will stop monitoring the PDCCH according to the parameters configured by SS set1 and SS set2, and start monitoring the PDCCH according to the parameters configured by SS set3 and SS set4.
  • Mode 1 When the UE starts to monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, the timer will be started at the same time. When the timer expires, the UE will switch to SSSG0, that is, the UE starts to monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0, and stops monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1.
  • the length of the above timer may be configured by the base station to the UE.
  • Mode 2 When the UE works in SSSG1, that is, monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, after a period of time (duration), the UE will switch to SSSG0, that is, the UE starts to monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0, and stops according to the SS set in SSSG1.
  • the SS set monitors the PDCCH.
  • the above-mentioned period of time may be configured by the base station to the UE.
  • the UE detects any format of DCI according to the SS set in SSSG0, and the UE monitors the SS set of the PDCCH and switches from SSSG0 to SSSG1.
  • the SS set in the BWP is divided into two groups as an example for description, which is not intended to limit the present application.
  • the SS set in BWP can be divided into groups other than 2.
  • the SS set in the BWP can be divided into three groups, namely SSSG0, SSSG1 and SSSG2, and the UE can switch between the above three SSSGs.
  • bidirectional handover between SSSGs is used as an example.
  • the handover between SSSG0 and SSSG1 can be switched from SSSG0 to SSSG1, or from SSSG1 to SSSG0, which is not a limitation to the embodiments of the present application .
  • the SSSG handover in this embodiment of the present application may also be a one-way handover, for example, only the handover from SSSG0 to SSSG1 is supported, or only the handover from SSSG1 to SSSG0 is supported.
  • each SSSG contains at least one SS set.
  • the UE may determine the PDCCH monitoring timing according to the configured parameters of the SS set. Therefore, for SSSG handover, no matter which SSSG the UE switches to, the UE will monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set in the SSSG, the difference is that the PDCCH monitoring timing is sparse.
  • one of the SSSGs is set to have no PDCCH monitoring opportunity or no candidate PDCCH or no SS set, hereinafter referred to as an empty SSSG.
  • set SSSG0 in FIG. 9 to an empty SSSG
  • set SSSG1 in FIG. 10 to be an empty SSSG.
  • the solution of switching between different SSSGs according to the indication field in the DCI can be As shown in Table 2, when the DCI indication field is 00, the UE switches from SSSG1 to SSSG0, that is, the UE monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0, and stops monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1.
  • the UE switches from SSG0 to SSSG1, that is, the UE monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, and stops monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0.
  • the DCI indication field is 10
  • the UE switches to SSSG2, which is an empty SSSG, there is no PDCCH monitoring opportunity, and the UE no longer monitors the PDCCH, thereby saving energy consumption. It should be indicated that when the DCI indication field is 10, the UE can switch from SSSG1 to the above SSSG2, or can switch from SSSG0 to the above SSSG2, etc., which is not limited.
  • DCI indication field SSSG switch 00 Switch from SSSG1 to SSSG0 01 Switch from SSSG0 to SSSG1 10 Switch to SSSG2, SSSG2 is empty SSSG
  • Enhanced scheme 2 Combine the dynamic SSSG switching scheme in scheme 4 above with the DCI-based PDCCH skipping scheme in scheme 3 above.
  • the base station can instruct the UE to perform SSSG handover or PDCCH skipping through the DCI indication field.
  • the UE stops monitoring the PDCCH during the duration of 2 that is, the UE starts timing after receiving the above-mentioned DCI and satisfying the effective delay, and no longer monitors the PDCCH for the duration 2.
  • the unit of the time domain unit may be time slot or symbol, etc., which is not limited.
  • the above-mentioned solutions may be used alone or in combination.
  • the applicant has found through research that the following problems may exist when combining the PDCCH-based WUS solution in the above solution 2 with the dynamic SSSG handover solution in the above solution 4:
  • each SSSG includes at least one SS set.
  • the base station When each SS set is configured, the base station will configure it on the candidate PDCCH.
  • the UE works in SSSG0 at the activation time of the DRX cycle, and the SSSG0 includes the SS set for monitoring DCI formats 2-6.
  • the UE receives the handover command and switches from SSSG0 to SSSG1, which does not include the SS set for monitoring DCI formats 2-6.
  • the UE also works in SSSG1 all the time.
  • the SSSG1 does not include the SS set for monitoring DCI formats 2-6, the UE cannot monitor the WUS within the WUS time window.
  • the UE works in the SSSG0, and the SSSG0 includes the SS set for monitoring the WUS.
  • the UE switches to the SSSG1.
  • the SSSG1 is an empty SSSG, that is, there is no PDCCH monitoring opportunity in the SSSG. Since the duration of the UE working on the SSSG1 includes the WUS time window, the UE cannot monitor the WUS within the WUS time window.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method.
  • the method includes: at the activation time of the first DRX cycle, the UE works in the first SSSG.
  • the UE switches from the first SSSG to the second SSSG before the WUS time window from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the inactive time of the first DRX cycle.
  • the second SSSG may include an SS set for monitoring the WUS. Therefore, the UE can monitor the WUS within the WUS time window, so that the WUS can realize its function and save the energy consumption of the UE.
  • the first embodiment provides a flowchart of a communication method, including at least:
  • Step 1300 The base station sends RRC signaling to the UE, where the RRC signaling is used to configure at least one of the following parameters:
  • the serving cell may include at least one BWP, and the base station may configure an SS set for one or more BWPs in the at least one BWP.
  • the base station may activate one of the above at least one BWP, which is called an activated BWP.
  • the UE and the base station can transmit data or signaling on the activated BWP.
  • the BWP may refer to the downlink BWP, and the UE and the base station perform downlink transmission on the downlink BWP through the PDSCH or the PDCCH.
  • the configuration information of the SSSG in the BWP that is, which SSSG the SS set in the BWP belongs to.
  • the parameters of the SS set configured above may further include: a search space group ID list, which is used to indicate which SSSG the configured SS set belongs to.
  • the search space group identifier list may include the identifier of the SSSG configured to the SS set.
  • an SS set may be configured to belong to one SSSG, may be configured to belong to multiple SSSGs, and may also be configured to not belong to any SSSG, etc., without limitation.
  • an SS set when an SS set is not configured with the parameter search space group identification list, it may indicate that the SS set does not belong to any SSSG.
  • the SS set parameter for the BWP of the serving cell at least one SS set can be configured for the BWP.
  • the SS set can be configured to different SSSGs by configuring the parameter search space group identification list for the SS set.
  • the serving cell of the UE includes 4 BWPs, and the SS set can be configured for the BWPs.
  • One BWP in the above-mentioned 4 BWPs, for example, BWP0 is configured with 4 SS sets.
  • the search space group identification list for the above-mentioned 4 SS sets the above-mentioned 4 SS sets can be divided into different SSSGs.
  • the configured search space group identification of SS set0 to SS set2 in the above four SS sets is 0, and the configured search space group identification of SS set3 is 1, then the SS set of the above BWP0 can be divided into two SSSGs , where SSSG0 includes SS set0, SS set1 and SS set2, and SSSG1 includes SS set3.
  • the SSSG may be an empty SSSG, or a non-empty SSSG. If there is no PDCCH monitoring opportunity or candidate PDCCH in an SSSG, the SSSG is called an empty SSSG; otherwise, the SSSG is called a non-empty SSSG.
  • the non-empty SSSG includes at least one SS set, and the parameters of the SS set define the candidate PDCCH and PDCCH listening timing.
  • the empty SSSG includes but is not limited to the following situations:
  • Case 1 An SSSG identity (identity document, ID) x is defined, but the SSSG identity in the search space group identity list of any SS set is not configured as the SSSG identity x. That is, there is no SS set in the SSSG identified as x.
  • Case 2 Define an SSSG identity x, and configure the SSSG identity in the search space group identity list of one or more SS sets as the SSSG identity x. However, if there is no PDCCH monitoring opportunity in the above-mentioned one or more SS sets, the SSSGx is called an empty SSSG. In one design, when the PDCCH monitoring period and offset of a certain SS set are configured as null (null), the duration of monitoring PDCCH is configured as 0, or the PDCCH monitoring pattern in the time slot is configured as all 0s, etc., the SS There is no PDCCH listening opportunity for set.
  • the parameters include at least one of the following:
  • the PS-RNTI is used to scramble the DCI carrying WUS.
  • the SS set of DCI format 2-6 that is, the SS set that can be used to transmit WUS.
  • the parameters of the SS set configured above may include the DCI format.
  • the WUS indication bit may be 0 or 1, which is used to indicate whether the UE enables drx-onDurationTimer subsequently.
  • the UE may determine the WUS window according to the relevant parameters of the WUS time window. For example, in one design, the base station may configure a time offset (ps-Offset) for the UE through an RRC parameter.
  • the time offset refers to the time offset between the start position of the WUS time window and the start position of the drx-onDurationTimer.
  • the DRX-related parameters configured by the base station for the UE may at least include the timers shown in Table 1 above.
  • This step 1300 is optional: it is not necessary to perform step 1300 before performing the following steps 1301 and 1302 .
  • the base station may configure semi-static parameters for the UE through the RRC signaling in the above step 1300; the above parameters are all valid until the semi-static parameters are reconfigured next time. Between two RRC configurations, the UE may perform multiple SSSG handovers using the following steps 1301 and 1302 .
  • Step 1301 At the activation time of the first DRX cycle, the UE works in the first SSSG.
  • the above-mentioned first SSSG may be a non-empty SSSG or an empty SSSG. If the first SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, the process of the UE working in the first SSSG may include: the UE may monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set in the first SSSG. However, if the first SSSG is an empty SSSG, the above-mentioned process of the UE working in the first SSSG may include: since the first SSSG has no PDCCH monitoring opportunity or candidate PDCCH, the UE does not monitor the PDCCH during the period of the first SSSG. .
  • the above-mentioned PDCCH that the UE does not monitor during the first SSSG (empty SSSG) period may refer to Type3-PDCCH CSS and PDCCH of USS.
  • the DRX cycle includes active time, inactive time, and the like. Wherein, during the activation time, the UE is in an awake state and monitors the PDCCH, and during the inactive time, the UE is in a dormant state and no longer monitors the PDCCH, thereby saving the power consumption of the UE.
  • the activation time of the UE in the DRX cycle may include at least one of the following timers running: drx-onDurationTimer, drx-Inactivity Timer, drx-Retransmission TimerDL, or drx-Retransmission TimerUL, etc.
  • multiple BWPs may exist between the UE and the base station, the multiple BWPs include an activated BWP, and the UE and the base station may transmit data or signaling on the activated BWP.
  • multiple SS sets can be configured on the activated BWP, and the multiple SS sets can be divided into one or more SSSGs.
  • the UE may work in one of the SSSGs, and the SSSG that the UE works is referred to as the first SSSG.
  • the first DRX cycle can be described as follows: from the foregoing description, the base station can configure DRX parameters for the UE through RRC signaling, and the UE can determine the length of the DRX cycle according to the DRX parameters. According to the length of the above DRX cycle, the UE may determine at least one DRX cycle. Each DRX cycle may include an active time and an inactive time. For an illustration of one DRX cycle, see FIG. 4 .
  • the first DRX cycle may be any one of the above at least one DRX cycle.
  • the first DRX cycle may refer to the i-th DRX cycle in FIG. 4 , or the i+1-th DRX cycle in FIG. 4 .
  • the i is any integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the length of the DRX cycle in the DRX parameters configured by the base station for the UE through RRC signaling is 10ms.
  • the UE can determine that every 10ms is a DRX cycle, and each DRX cycle can include the activation time. and inactive time, etc.
  • the above-mentioned first DRX may be any DRX cycle of 10 ms or the like.
  • the length of the DRX cycle can be reconfigured through step 1300 .
  • Step 1302 During the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, the UE switches from the first SSSG to the second SSSG. Specifically, the UE switches from the first SSSG to the second SSSG from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the time for monitoring the WUS in the first DRX cycle.
  • the second SSSG may include an SS set for monitoring the WUS, and the UE may monitor the WUS within the WUS time window according to the SS set for monitoring the WUS.
  • the UE may determine the time when the inactive time of the first DRX cycle starts and the time for monitoring the WUS during the inactive time of the first DRX cycle. Between the above two times, the UE switches from the first SSSG to the second SSSG.
  • the UE determines the inactive time of the first DRX cycle: in one design, the UE may consider the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to start when at least one timer expires.
  • the above timer may include at least one of the following timers: drx-onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-Retransmission TimerDL, or drx-Retransmission TimerUL, and the like.
  • the UE may consider the first DRX cycle of the UE to be inactive at the time when the last timer in the above at least one timer stops running. Time begins.
  • the UE turns on drx-onDurationTimer and is in the active time.
  • the subsequent UE receives the PDCCH used by the base station to schedule the new transmission, and starts the drx-InactivityTimer.
  • the start of the inactivity time of the first DRX cycle is defined in this way: the time when both drx-onDurationTimer and drx-InactivityTimer time out can be considered as the start of the inactivity time of the first DRX cycle. For example, at the first time, the drx-onDurationTimer times out, and at the second time, the drx-InactivityTimer times out. If the second time is later than the first time, the UE considers that the inactive time of the first DRX cycle starts at the second time.
  • the activation time of the DRX cycle may include other scenarios besides the above-mentioned scenario of running the timer.
  • the inactive time in which the UE enters the first DRX cycle is considered as an example when the timer times out, which is not a limitation on the embodiments of the present application. It can be understood that, the above-mentioned inactive time of the first DRX cycle may refer to a time other than the active time of the first DRX cycle.
  • the UE determines the time for monitoring the WUS during the inactive time in the first DRX cycle. Because in the current solution, the UE monitors the WUS in the WUS time window.
  • the above-mentioned time that the UE monitors the WUS during the inactive time in the first DRX cycle may be any time in the WUS time window, and the any time may be predefined or pre-configured by a protocol, or the like.
  • the time may be the start time of the WUS time window, or the end time of the WUS time window, or the like. In FIG. 14 , it is illustrated by taking the time as the start time of the WUS time window as an example.
  • the UE can determine the WUS time window according to the time offset (PS offset) configured for it by the base station and the minimum time offset (minimum offset) determined by the UE.
  • PS offset refers to the time interval from the start position of the WUS time window to the start time of drx-onDurationTimer.
  • minimum offset refers to the time interval from the end position of the WUS time window to the start time of drx-onDurationTimer.
  • the UE can determine the end position of the WUS time window; the UE determines the start position of the WUS time window. , and the end position of the WUS time window, so that the position of the entire WUS time window can be determined.
  • the UE may switch from the first SSSG to the second SSSG at any time from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the time before the time for monitoring the WUS during the inactive time of the first DRX cycle.
  • the second SSSG may be defined by the protocol or configured by the base station for the UE.
  • a default SSSG may be defined by means of protocol definition, or the base station configures for the UE.
  • the UE falls back to the default SSSG, which is the second SSSG.
  • the UE may receive configuration information from the base station, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG; the UE may determine a second SSSG, and the determined second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
  • the at least one SSSG may be all SSSGs configured by the base station for the UE on the currently activated BWP.
  • the UE may determine one SSSG among all the configured SSSGs, that is, the second SSSG, and the second SSSG should be different from the first SSSG.
  • the UE may exclude the first SSSG from all the configured SSSGs, and the remaining SSSGs form a candidate SSSG, and the UE selects one SSSG among the candidate SSSGs, which is the second SSSG.
  • the above at least one SSSG is a candidate SSSG configured by the base station for the UE, and the candidate SSSG includes at least one SSSG; the UE may select one SSSG from the candidate SSSG, and the selected SSSG is the second SSSG and the like.
  • the biggest difference between this design and the above-mentioned first design is that in this design, the second SSSG is not the default SSSG, but needs to be queried or determined by the UE itself.
  • the second SSSG that the UE needs to query or determine by itself may be an SSSG that includes an SS set for monitoring the WUS.
  • a special SSSG may be defined as the second SSSG, and the SSSG includes an SS set only for monitoring the WUS.
  • the UE switches to the SSSG, and can monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set used to monitor the WUS in the SSSG.
  • the UE may directly switch from the first SSSG to the second SSSG at the beginning of the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, or when the activation time of the first DRX cycle ends.
  • SSSG When the inactive time of the first DRX cycle starts, or the activation time of the first DRX cycle ends, it can be considered as drx-onDurationTimer timeout, or drx-InactivityTimer timeout, or drx-Retransmission TimerDL timeout, or drx-Retransmission TimerUL timeout, etc.
  • the UE before the WUS time window, the UE can switch to the second SSSG, and the second SSSG includes the SS set for monitoring the WUS, so that the UE can monitor the WUS according to the SS set, thereby enabling the UE to monitor the WUS. It can be determined whether to enable drx-onDurationTimer according to WUS. WUS realizes its function and saves UE power consumption.
  • the above solution is applied to the UE side for description.
  • the above solution can also be applied to the base station side. If the above solution is applied to the base station side, when the base station determines that the UE is working in the first SSSG at the activation time of the first DRX cycle according to the above method, and if the first SSSG is not empty, the base station can follow the The configuration of the SS set sends the PDCCH to the UE.
  • the base station may follow the Configuration of SS set, sending PDCCH, etc.
  • the above-mentioned second SSSG includes an SS set for monitoring the WUS.
  • the base station can send the WUS according to the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring the WUS. Wait.
  • the above-mentioned second SSSG may be defined by a protocol, or determined by the base station, or the like.
  • the above-mentioned second SSSG may include a search space set only for monitoring WUS, and no longer include other types of SS sets.
  • the base station may send configuration information to the UE, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG, and the at least one SSSG includes the second SSSG and the like.
  • the second embodiment provides a communication method, which is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that, during the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, regardless of whether the UE is left in any SSSG, the UE monitors the WUS according to the SS set used to monitor the WUS. , without SSSG handover.
  • the above-mentioned SS set used to monitor the WUS can be configured with SSSG, or it can no longer be configured with SSSG, which is not limited.
  • the base station may send the above-mentioned configuration information of the SS set used to monitor the WUS to the UE, where the configuration information of the SS set includes the configuration information used to determine the SSSG, or does not include the configuration information used to determine the SSSG Information, etc., are not limited.
  • the second embodiment provides a flow of a communication method, and the flow includes at least:
  • Step 1500 The base station configures at least one parameter for the UE through RRC signaling.
  • the base station configures at least one parameter for the UE through RRC signaling.
  • the configuration information may include the configuration information used to determine the SSSG, or not include the configuration information used to determine the SSSG . If the configuration information includes configuration information for determining the SSSG, it means that the SS set monitoring the WUS belongs to the corresponding SSSG, otherwise the SS set monitoring the WUS does not belong to any SSSG.
  • the above-mentioned configuration information for monitoring the SS set of the WUS may include indication information for indicating the SSSG identity, for example, including a search space group identity list and the like.
  • other information in the configuration information may indirectly indicate the SSSG, for example, at least one of the PDCCH monitoring period, offset or PDCCH monitoring pattern in the configuration information may indirectly indicate the SSSG to which the SS set belongs, etc. .
  • This step 1500 is optional.
  • Step 1501 During the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, the UE works in any SSSG, and the UE monitors the WUS according to the SS set for monitoring the WUS.
  • the UE may determine the WUS time window, and it can be understood that the WUS time window is within the inactive time of the first DRX cycle.
  • the UE monitors the WUS according to the SS set used to monitor the WUS, regardless of whether the UE works in any SSSG. Specifically, the following situations can be discussed:
  • the above-mentioned SS set used to monitor WUS is not pre-configured with the SSSG to which it belongs. Then, the UE can monitor WUS according to the SS set used to monitor WUS in any SSSG within the WUS time window. For example, if there are two SSSGs, and the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring the WUS does not belong to any of the above-mentioned two SSSGs, then within the WUS time window, no matter if the UE works in any of the above-mentioned two SSSGs, it can The above SS set used to monitor WUS, monitor WUS.
  • the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS is pre-configured with the identifiers of all SSSGs, that is, each SSSG includes the SS set used for monitoring WUS, then, the UE is in the WUS time window, no matter in any SSSG, WUS can be monitored according to the SS set used to monitor WUS. For example, if there are two SSSGs, and the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring the WUS belongs to each of the above-mentioned two SSSGs, within the WUS time window, no matter the UE works in any SSSG in the above-mentioned two SSSGs, it can be determined according to the The above SS set used to monitor WUS, monitor WUS.
  • the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS is pre-configured with some SSSG identifiers, but in the WUS time window, the monitoring of the above SS set is not affected by the SSSG, that is, in the WUS time window, the UE is in any Both the SSSG and the UE can monitor the WUS according to the above SS set.
  • the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS belongs to SSSG0. In the WUS time window, even if the UE is in SSSG1, the UE can still monitor the WUS according to the SS set in SSSG0 for monitoring the WUS, but the UE will not stop SSSG1.
  • the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS can also be referred to as the SS set of DCI format 2-6.
  • the SS set of the DCI format 2_6 can also be used to monitor the DCI of other formats, etc., in addition to being used for monitoring the DCI of the above-mentioned format 2_6, which is not limited. That is, the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS can also be used for carrying other functions in addition to the DCI bearing WUS function, which is not limited.
  • the UE monitors the WUS during the inactive time of the first DRX cycle and is not affected by the SSSG.
  • whether the UE monitors the SS set of the DCI format 2_6 depends on the SSSG where the UE is currently located. For example, there are two SSSGs, the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS belongs to SSSG0.
  • the SS set used to monitor WUS is also used to monitor other DCI formats.
  • the UE switches to SSSG1
  • it does not monitor the SS set.
  • the UE switches to SSSG0
  • the UE can monitor the WUS during the inactive time, saving the power consumption of the UE.
  • the effective delay refers to the time required for the UE to switch to the SSSG.
  • the effective delay may refer to the time interval from when the UE receives the SSSG handover command to the time when the UE is handed over to the SSSG.
  • the UE works in SSSG0, receives DCI and instructs the UE to switch to SSSG1, then the start time of the effective delay Y can be the end position of the last symbol where the DCI is located, or the end of the time slot where the DCI is located. position, or the start position of the symbol where the DCI is located, or the start position of the time slot where the DCI is located, etc., the effective delay Y is a time length, from the start time of the effective delay Y, after the time length corresponding to the effective delay Y, the UE Switch to SSSG1.
  • the rules for the effective delay Y should be different. For example, for switching to an empty SSSG, the value of the effective delay Y should be as small as possible. This is because in practice, the base station only sends a handover command to the UE when it predicts that there will be no data scheduling for a short period of time, so that the UE is handed over to an empty SSSG. If the value of the effective delay Y is large, it may be greater than the value of the above-mentioned short period of time, and it is obviously unreasonable for the UE to switch to the above-mentioned empty SSSG. The power consumption of the UE can also be saved.
  • both the current base station and the UE work in SSSG0, and the base station sends a signaling of switching SSSG to the UE. If the UE misses the detection of this signaling, the subsequent base station switches to SSSG1, while the UE remains in SSSG0, which may lead to different PDCCH monitoring timings of the base station and the UE, and the UE cannot monitor the PDCCH for a long period of time.
  • the UE considers the handover delay differently. How the UE determines the corresponding handover delay according to the type of the SSSG to be handed over is a problem to be solved in the embodiment of the present application. For details, refer to the description of the following Embodiment 3.
  • the third embodiment of the present application provides a process of a communication method, which at least includes:
  • Step 1700 The base station sends RRC signaling to the UE, where the RRC signaling is used to configure at least one of the following parameters:
  • Step 1700 is optional: it is not necessary to perform step 1700 before steps 1701 and 1702 .
  • the base station configures the above parameters through RRC signaling; subsequently, the UE directly uses the configured parameters to perform SSSG handover. Subsequently, before the base station reconfigures the above-mentioned relevant parameters, the above-mentioned parameters are all valid. Between two RRC signaling configurations, the UE may use steps 1701 and 1702 to perform multiple SSSG handovers.
  • Step 1701 The UE determines the SSSG to be handed over.
  • the UE determines the SSSG to be switched to, and the effective delay may refer to the time interval between the time when the UE meets the first condition and the time interval between the time when the UE switches to the SSSG.
  • the above-mentioned first condition may include: the UE receives a DCI sent by the base station, where the DCI is used to instruct the UE to switch the SSSG. Or, the duration of the UE monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in the SSSG before the handover reaches the first duration.
  • the UE monitors the DCI according to the SSSG before the handover, and the DCI can be a DCI of any format, or a DCI format predefined by a protocol, such as at least one of the DCI formats 0_0, 0_1, 1_0, 1_1, 0_2, 1_2, etc. .
  • the effective delay may refer to the time interval from the time when the UE receives the DCI to the time when the UE switches to the SSSG.
  • the time when the UE receives the DCI may refer to the end position of the last symbol where the DCI is located, or the end position of the time slot where the DCI is located, or the start position of the symbol where the DCI is located, or the start position of the time slot where the DCI is located.
  • Step 1702 The UE determines the effective delay according to the type of the SSSG to be switched to.
  • the type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG.
  • the empty SSSG means that there is no PDDCH monitoring opportunity or candidate PDCCH in the SSSG.
  • the UE may determine the effective delay according to any of the following examples:
  • the UE may determine the effective delay according to the corresponding relationship between the first subcarrier interval and a time parameter, and the time parameter is used to determine the effective delay; optionally, the above-mentioned first subcarrier interval may be When the first condition is satisfied, the UE activates the subcarrier spacing of the BWP.
  • the corresponding relationship between the parameter ⁇ of the subcarrier spacing and the time parameter Z ⁇ can be predefined or configured.
  • the UE may determine the first sub-carrier interval of the currently activated BWP; after that, the UE searches for the time parameter Z ⁇ corresponding to the first sub-carrier interval in the correspondence shown in the above Table 4, the time The value of parameter Z ⁇ is the effective delay.
  • the value of the effective delay is equal to the time parameter Z ⁇ .
  • the activated BWP of the UE may be switched during the effective delay period, the corresponding subcarrier interval may also change.
  • the above-mentioned effective delay is usually in units of time slots or symbols.
  • the absolute duration of the above-mentioned effective delay for example, the duration in milliseconds, etc.
  • the duration is not the same. Therefore, it may be necessary to convert the effective delays of different subcarrier intervals.
  • the UE may determine the effective delay according to the time parameter Z ⁇ corresponding to the first subcarrier interval. For example, when the UE satisfies the first condition, the subcarrier spacing for activating BWP is ⁇ 1 corresponding to the subcarrier spacing, and ⁇ 2 corresponding to the subcarrier spacing for newly activated BWP during the SSSG handover process. If the subcarrier spacing ⁇ 1 is the same as the subcarrier spacing If the carrier interval ⁇ 2 is different, the effective delay Y is
  • the UE may jointly determine the effective delay according to the time parameters Z ⁇ and K 0min corresponding to the first subcarrier interval, where
  • the value of K 0min is the K 0min at which the currently activated BWP takes effect in the above one or more K 0mins .
  • the effective delay Y is where K 0min is K 0min at which the activated BWP of the scheduled serving cell (or the serving cell indicated by the DCI) takes effect, and ⁇ PDSCH is the parameter of the subcarrier interval of the activated BWP of the scheduled serving cell (or the serving cell indicated by the DCI) , ⁇ PDCCH is the parameter of the sub-carrier interval of the activated BWP of the scheduled serving cell (or the serving cell where the DCI is located), Z ⁇ is the sub-carrier interval of the activated BWP of the scheduled serving cell (or the serving cell where the DCI is located) corresponds to time parameter.
  • K0 is the time slot offset between the PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH.
  • K0>0 indicates that the PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH are not in the same time slot.
  • K 0min is the minimum available time slot offset of the PDSCH when the PDSCH is scheduled by the PDCCH, that is, the time slot offset value K0 between the PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH should be greater than or equal to K 0min .
  • K 0min may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the base station for the UE, etc., and may refer to the current technology without limitation.
  • the above description is given by taking an example that the value of the effective delay is equal to the larger value of the time parameter Z ⁇ and K 0min .
  • the effective delay can be converted according to the subcarrier spacing. If the converted effective delay is not an integer multiple of time slots, the converted effective delay can be rounded up or down.
  • the above-mentioned effective delay may be predefined by the protocol, or a value configured by the base station for the UE, or the like.
  • the base station may configure an effective delay for the UE through RRC signaling, and the unit of the effective delay may be a symbol, a time slot, or a millisecond, which is not limited.
  • the last unit of the effective delay used by the UE needs to be a time slot. If the unit of the effective delay configured by the base station is symbols or milliseconds, the effective delay can be converted into at least one time slot.
  • the effective time delay of is not an integer multiple of the time slot, and the converted time slot number can be rounded up or down.
  • the UE may report the minimum value of the effective delay to the base station.
  • the value of the effective delay configured by the base station for the UE should be greater than the above-mentioned minimum value of the effective delay.
  • the UE may report the minimum value of the above-mentioned effective delay through UE capability signaling, and the minimum value of the UE effective delay may be related to the UE's capability and the subcarrier interval ⁇ .
  • the corresponding relationship between the subcarrier interval ⁇ and the UE capability and the effective delay can be referred to as shown in Table 5.
  • the UE can schedule PDSCH or PDSCH according to the DCI. PUSCH, and determine the effective delay.
  • the UE may determine the effective delay according to the time unit offset of the HARQ feedback corresponding to the scheduled PDSCH.
  • the time unit may include time units such as radio frame (radio frame), subframe (subframe), time slot (slot), mini-slot (mini-slot) or symbol (symbol).
  • one radio frame may include one or more subframes
  • one subframe may include one or more time slots.
  • a slot can include one or more symbols.
  • the next time slot of a normal cyclic prefix (cyclic prefix, CP) may include 14 symbols, and the next time slot of an extended CP may include 12 symbols.
  • a mini-slot also known as a mini-slot, can be a smaller unit than a time slot, and a mini-slot can include one or more symbols.
  • a mini-slot may include 2 symbols, 4 symbols or 7 symbols and so on.
  • a time slot may include one or more mini-slots.
  • a radio frame can last for 10ms, each subframe can last for 1ms, a radio frame includes 10 subframes, each slot lasts 1ms, and each subframe can include 1 slot, Each slot may include 14 symbols. Further, the mini-slot may include 4 symbols, 2 symbols, or 7 symbols, and so on.
  • the time unit is a time slot and the time unit offset is a time slot offset as an example for description.
  • the time slot offset between the PDSCH and the HARQ feedback corresponding to the PDSCH is K1
  • the effective delay Y is the time slot offset between the time slot where the DCI is located and the time slot where the HARQ feedback is located, for example, It can be expressed as K0+K1.
  • K0 refers to the time slot offset between the PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH.
  • K1 refers to the time slot offset between the PDSCH and the HARQ feedback corresponding to the PDSCH. Therefore, the sum of the values of K1 and K0 is the time slot offset of the DCI carried by the PDCCH and the HARQ feedback.
  • K1>0 indicates that the PDSCH and the HARQ feedback corresponding to the PDSCH are not in the same time slot.
  • the value of K0 please refer to the above.
  • the UE when the UE meets the effective time delay or later, regardless of whether the HARQ feedback is ACK or NACK, the UE switches to the SSSG to be switched to.
  • the UE meets the valid time delay or later, when the HARQ feedback is ACK, the UE switches to the SSSG to be switched to.
  • the HARQ feedback is NACK, the UE does not perform handover of the SSSG.
  • the UE may determine the effective delay according to the time slot offset of the scheduled PUSCH. For example, the value of the time slot offset between the PDCCH and the scheduled PUSCH is K2, and the value of the effective time slot may be equal to K2.
  • K2>0 indicating that the PDCCH and the scheduled PUSCH are not in the same time slot.
  • Step 1703 The UE switches to the SSSG to be switched to according to the effective delay.
  • Step 1703 is optional, and the UE may switch to the SSSG to be switched to after a delay or after the validation is satisfied.
  • the switch to the above-mentioned to-be-switched SSSG or the like is not performed after the delay or after the validation is satisfied, which is not limited.
  • the SSSG is switched only when the HARQ feedback of the DCI-scheduled PDSCH is ACK, otherwise the SSSG is not switched.
  • the following scenarios may be considered: If the HARQ feedback is NACK, it means that the UE did not correctly decode the corresponding HARQ feedback PDSCH, the base station needs to retransmit the PDSCH, and does not need to switch the SSSG. If the HARQ feedback is ACK, it means that the current PDSCH transmission is successful, and there may be no subsequent service transmission. At this time, you can switch to the SSSG with sparse PDCCH monitoring opportunities.
  • the type of the SSSG to be switched to is considered, and different effective delays of the SSSG to be switched to are determined to meet the requirements of different scenarios.
  • the base station may determine the SSSG to which the UE is to be handed over; the base station determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG to be handed over, that is, the effective delay. The base station determines that the UE switches to the SSSG according to the effective delay. Afterwards, the base station may send the PDCCH to the UE according to the SSSG handed over by the UE.
  • the base station may determine the SSSG to which the UE is to be handed over when the second condition is satisfied.
  • the second condition includes: the base station sends DCI to the UE, and the DCI is used to instruct the UE to switch to the SSSG; or, the base station determines that the duration for the UE to send the PDCCH according to the SS set in the SSSG before the switch reaches the first duration, or, the base station passes
  • the process of determining the effective delay according to the type of the SSSG to be switched to by the base station may be: if the type of the SSSG to be switched to is an empty SSSG, the base station can The corresponding relationship between the interval and the time parameter determines the effective delay, and the time parameter is used to determine the effective delay.
  • the foregoing first subcarrier interval may be the subcarrier interval of the BWP activated by the UE.
  • the effective delay is predefined by the protocol or configured by the base station for the UE, etc., which is not limited.
  • how the base station determines the effective delay according to the corresponding relationship between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter is as follows:
  • the value of the effective delay is equal to the corresponding value of the first subcarrier interval. or, the value of the effective delay is determined according to the time parameter corresponding to the first subcarrier interval.
  • the time parameter corresponding to the first subcarrier interval may be transformed with different subcarrier intervals to obtain the effective delay and the like.
  • the value of the effective delay may be the larger value of the time parameter corresponding to the first subcarrier interval and the minimum scheduling offset value determined by the base station for scheduling the PDSCH.
  • the above-mentioned effective delay is determined according to the larger value of the above two. For example, the larger value of the above two can be converted into different subcarrier intervals to obtain the effective delay and the like.
  • the base station can determine the effective delay according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI. For example, the base station may determine the effective delay according to the time slot offset of the HARQ feedback corresponding to the PDSCH. Alternatively, the effective delay and the like may be determined according to the time slot offset of the scheduled PUSCH.
  • the base station can determine that the UE can switch to the SSSG to be switched to regardless of whether the HARQ feedback of the UE received by the base station is ACK or NACK after the time delay when the effective time is satisfied. Or, after satisfying the said effective time delay or after, only when the HARQ feedback of the UE received by the base station is ACK, the base station can determine that the UE switches to the above-mentioned SSSG to be switched to; otherwise, the base station can determine that the UE does not switch to the above-mentioned pending SSSG Switch to SSSG etc.
  • the effective delay modes of the UE performing SSSG handover and skipping PDCCH monitoring are consistent.
  • the base station or UE hopes that the effective delay should be as small as possible.
  • the base station or UE may consider other factors. Therefore, how to determine the corresponding effective delay according to different types of SSSG handover or skip PDCCH monitoring is a problem to be solved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the fourth embodiment provides a communication method, including: the UE can receive DCI from the base station, where the DCI is used to instruct the SSSSG to switch or skip PDCCH monitoring. If the DCI is used to instruct the SSSG handover, the effective delay can be determined according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI. Refer to the third embodiment above. When the SSSG type is non-null, the effective delay is determined. Alternatively, when the DCI is used to indicate skipping PDCCH monitoring, the effective delay may be determined according to the corresponding relationship between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, or the effective delay may be predefined by the protocol or configured by the base station For the value of , please refer to the third implementation above.
  • the method of determining the effective delay is determined.
  • the UE switches to the empty SSSG when the time delay or after the valid time is satisfied.
  • the UE stops monitoring the PDCCH when the time delay or after the valid time is satisfied.
  • the effective delay of SSSG switching and stopping monitoring of PDCCH considers different influencing factors, and adopts different methods to determine the effective delay, so as to meet the needs of various scenarios.
  • the above solution is applied to the UE side as an example for description.
  • This solution can also be applied to the base station side.
  • the base station sends DCI to the UE.
  • the base station may determine the effective delay according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI.
  • the base station may send the PDCCH to the UE according to the SSSG to which it is handed over.
  • the base station may determine the effective delay according to the corresponding relationship between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, or by means of protocol pre-definition.
  • the base station may no longer send the PDCCH to the UE.
  • the UE does not monitor the PDCCH after the delay or after the above-mentioned validation is satisfied, thereby saving the power consumption of the base station and the UE.
  • the execution subject directly uses the UE and the base station as an example for description. It can be understood that the UE can be replaced by a terminal device, and the base station can be replaced by a network device.
  • the terminal device and the network device reference may be made to the description in FIG. 1 above.
  • FIG. 19 shows a possible block diagram of the apparatus involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 1900 may include: a communication unit 1901 for supporting the communication between the apparatus and other devices.
  • the communication unit 1901 is also referred to as a transceiver unit, and may include a receiving unit and/or a sending unit, which are respectively configured to perform receiving and sending operations.
  • the processing unit 1902 is used to support the device to perform processing.
  • the apparatus 1900 may further include a storage unit 1903 for storing program codes and/or data of the apparatus 1900 .
  • the above apparatus may be a terminal device or a chip or circuit in the terminal device.
  • the communication unit 1901 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations of the UE in the first method embodiment above;
  • the processing unit 1902 is configured to perform the processing related operations of the UE in the first method embodiment above.
  • the processing unit 1902 is configured to work in the first search space set group SSSG during the activation time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to start from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the The first SSSG switches to the second SSSG before the time for monitoring the wake-up signal WUS in the inactive time of the first DRX cycle.
  • the processing unit 1902 is further configured to: the second SSSG includes a search space set for monitoring WUS, and at the inactive time of the first DRX, according to the search space set, Monitor the WUS.
  • the second SSSG is defined by a protocol or configured by a network device.
  • the second SSSG includes a set of search spaces only for listening to the WUS.
  • the communication unit 1901 is configured to receive configuration information from a network device, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG; the processing unit 1902 is configured to determine the second SSSG, the determined The second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
  • the above apparatus may be a network device or a chip or circuit in the network device.
  • the communication unit 1901 is configured to perform the transceiving operations of the base station in the first method embodiment above;
  • the processing unit 1902 is configured to perform the processing related operations of the base station in the first method embodiment above.
  • the processing unit 1902 is configured to, at the activation time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle, determine that the terminal device works in the first search space set group SSSG; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to deactivate the first DRX cycle It is determined that the terminal device is switched from the first SSSG to the second SSSG from the start of time to the time for monitoring the wake-up signal WUS within the inactive time of the first DRX cycle.
  • the processing unit 1902 is further configured to: the second SSSG includes a search space set for monitoring WUS, and at the inactive time of the first DRX, according to the search space set, Send the WUS.
  • the second SSSG is defined by a protocol, or determined by the network device.
  • the second SSSG includes a search space set only for monitoring WUS.
  • the communication unit 1901 is further configured to send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG, and the second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
  • the above apparatus may be a terminal device or a chip or circuit in the terminal device.
  • the communication unit 1901 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations of the UE in the second method embodiment above;
  • the processing unit 1902 is configured to perform the processing related operations of the UE in the second method embodiment above.
  • the communication unit 1901 is configured to receive the configuration information of the search space set used for monitoring the WUS in the second embodiment above, where the configuration information of the search space set includes the configuration information for determining the SSSG, or does not include the configuration information for determining the SSSG. is used to determine the configuration information of the SSSG; the processing unit 1902 is configured to execute the inactive time of the first DRX cycle in the above-mentioned embodiment 2, the terminal device works in any SSSG, and monitors all the SSSGs according to the search space set. described WUS.
  • the above apparatus may be a terminal device or a chip or circuit in the terminal device.
  • the communication unit 1901 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations of the UE in the third method embodiment above; the processing unit 1902 is configured to perform the UE processing related operations in the third method embodiment above.
  • the processing unit 1902 is configured to determine the search space set group SSSG to be switched to; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to determine the time required for switching to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, where the type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG, the empty SSSG means that there is no physical downlink control channel PDCCH monitoring opportunity or candidate PDCCH in the SSSG; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to switch to the desired SSSG according to the time required for switching to the SSSG described SSSG.
  • the terminal device determines the SSSG to be switched to, and the time required for switching to the SSSG refers to the difference between the time when the terminal device satisfies the first condition and the time required to switch to the SSSG. the interval at which the terminal device switches to the SSSG time;
  • the first condition includes: the terminal device receives downlink control information DCI from the network device, where the DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or, the terminal device according to the SSSG before switching
  • the duration of monitoring the PDCCH in the search space set in the SSSG reaches the first duration; or, the terminal device monitors the DCI according to the search space set in the SSSG before handover.
  • determining the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG includes: the type of the SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, and the first condition is that the terminal equipment After receiving the DCI from the network device, determine the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH scheduled by the DCI; or the type of the SSSG is empty SSSG, according to the first
  • the corresponding relationship between the subcarrier interval and the time parameter determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG, or the time required for the handover to the SSSG is predefined by a protocol or configured by a network device.
  • determining the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI includes: according to the time slot offset fed back by the HARQ corresponding to the PDSCH, the HARQ, determining the time required for the handover to the SSSG; or, determining the time required for the handover to the SSSG according to the scheduled time slot offset of the PUSCH.
  • the switching to the SSSG according to the time required for switching to the SSSG includes: when the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied or after the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied, regardless of the time required for switching to the SSSG. If the HARQ feedback is a positive acknowledgment or a negative acknowledgment, switch to the SSSG; or, when the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied, when the HARQ feedback is a positive acknowledgment or after, switch to the SSSG .
  • the first subcarrier spacing is the subcarrier spacing of the bandwidth part BWP activated when the terminal device satisfies the first condition.
  • the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter; or, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter and the It is determined by the larger value of the minimum scheduling offset value indicated by the network device for scheduling the PDSCH.
  • the above apparatus may be a network device or a chip or circuit in the network device.
  • the communication unit 1901 is configured to perform the transceiving operations of the base station in the third method embodiment above;
  • the processing unit 1902 is configured to perform the processing related operations of the base station in the third method embodiment above.
  • the processing unit 1902 is configured to determine the search space set group SSSG to which the terminal device is to be switched; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to determine the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG,
  • the type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG, and the empty SSSG means that there is no physical downlink control channel PDCCH monitoring opportunity or candidate PDCCH in the SSSG; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to switch to the selected PDCCH according to the terminal equipment. According to the time required by the SSSG, it is determined that the terminal device switches to the SSSG.
  • the network device determines the SSSG to which the terminal device is to be handed over, and the time required to switch to the SSSG means that the terminal device satisfies the second condition.
  • the second condition includes: the network device sends downlink control information DCI to the terminal device, where the DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or, the network device determines that the terminal device The duration that the device monitors the PDCCH according to the search space set in the SSSG before the handover reaches the first duration; or, the network device sends the DCI through the SSSG before the handover.
  • determining the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG includes: the type of the SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, and the second condition is:
  • the network device sends DCI to the terminal device, and determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH scheduled by the DCI; or, the SSSG
  • the type of the SSSG is empty, and according to the corresponding relationship between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is determined, and the time parameter is used to determine the time to switch to the SSSG. ; or, the time required by the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is predefined by the protocol or determined by the network device.
  • determining the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI includes: HARQ feedback according to the hybrid automatic repeat request corresponding to the PDSCH determine the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or determine the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the scheduled time slot offset of the PUSCH.
  • the determining that the terminal device switches to the SSSG according to the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG includes: satisfying the requirement that the terminal device switches to the SSSG At or after the required time, regardless of whether the HARQ feedback received by the network device from the terminal device is a positive confirmation or a negative confirmation, the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG; At or after the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG, when the HARQ feedback received by the network device from the terminal device is a positive acknowledgment, the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG SSSG.
  • the first subcarrier spacing is the subcarrier spacing of the bandwidth part BWP activated by the terminal device when the network device satisfies the second condition.
  • the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter; or, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter and the It is determined by the larger value of the minimum scheduling offset value indicated by the network device for scheduling the PDSCH.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device includes: an antenna 2010 , a radio frequency part 2020 , and a signal processing part 2030 .
  • the antenna 2010 is connected to the radio frequency part 2020 .
  • the radio frequency part 2020 receives the information sent by the network device through the antenna 2010, and sends the information sent by the network device to the signal processing part 2030 for processing.
  • the signal processing part 2030 processes the information of the terminal equipment and sends it to the radio frequency part 2020
  • the radio frequency part 2020 processes the information of the terminal equipment and sends it to the network equipment through the antenna 2010.
  • the signal processing part 2030 can include a modulation and demodulation subsystem, which is used to implement the processing of each communication protocol layer of the data; it can also include a central processing subsystem, which is used to implement the processing of the terminal device operating system and the application layer; in addition, it can also Including other subsystems, such as multimedia subsystem, peripheral subsystem, etc., wherein the multimedia subsystem is used to realize the control of the terminal equipment camera, screen display, etc., and the peripheral subsystem is used to realize the connection with other devices.
  • the modem subsystem can be a separate chip.
  • the modem subsystem may include one or more processing elements 2031, including, for example, a host CPU and other integrated circuits.
  • the modulation and demodulation subsystem may further include a storage element 2032 and an interface circuit 2033 .
  • the storage element 2032 is used for storing data and programs, but the program for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the above method may not be stored in the storage element 2032, but in a memory outside the modulation and demodulation subsystem, When used, the modem subsystem is loaded for use.
  • Interface circuit 2033 is used to communicate with other subsystems.
  • the modulation and demodulation subsystem can be implemented by a chip, the chip includes at least one processing element and an interface circuit, wherein the processing element is used to execute each step of any one of the methods performed by the above terminal equipment, and the interface circuit is used to communicate with other devices.
  • the unit for the terminal device to implement each step in the above method may be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler.
  • an apparatus for a terminal device includes a processing element and a storage element, and the processing element calls the program stored in the storage element to Execute the method executed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
  • the storage element may be a storage element on the same chip as the processing element, ie, an on-chip storage element.
  • the program for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the above method may be in a storage element on a different chip from the processing element, that is, an off-chip storage element.
  • the processing element calls or loads the program from the off-chip storage element to the on-chip storage element, so as to call and execute the method performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
  • the unit for the terminal device to implement each step in the above method may be configured as one or more processing elements, and these processing elements are provided on the modulation and demodulation subsystem, and the processing element here may be an integrated circuit, For example: one or more ASICs, or, one or more DSPs, or, one or more FPGAs, or a combination of these types of integrated circuits. These integrated circuits can be integrated together to form chips.
  • the units of the terminal device implementing each step in the above method may be integrated together and implemented in the form of an SOC, and the SOC chip is used to implement the above method.
  • At least one processing element and a storage element may be integrated in the chip, and the method executed by the above terminal device may be implemented in the form of a program stored in the storage element being invoked by the processing element; or, at least one integrated circuit may be integrated in the chip to implement the above terminal.
  • the above apparatus for a terminal device may include at least one processing element and an interface circuit, where the at least one processing element is configured to execute any method performed by the terminal device provided in the above method embodiments.
  • the processing element can execute part or all of the steps performed by the terminal device in the first way: by calling the program stored in the storage element; or in the second way: by combining the instructions with the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor element Part or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may be performed in the manner of the first method; of course, some or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may also be performed in combination with the first manner and the second manner.
  • the processing element may be a general-purpose processor, such as a CPU, or may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, such as: one or more ASICs, or, one or more microprocessors, DSPs , or, one or more FPGAs, etc., or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms.
  • the storage element can be one memory or a collective term for multiple memories.
  • the network device may be an access network device (eg, a base station).
  • Access network equipment 210 may include one or more DUs 2101 and one or more CUs 2102.
  • the DU 2101 may include at least one antenna 21011, at least one radio frequency unit 21012, at least one processor 21013 and at least one memory 21014.
  • the DU 2101 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals, the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, and part of baseband processing.
  • the CU 2102 may include at least one processor 21022 and at least one memory 21021 .
  • the CU 2102 part is mainly used for baseband processing, control of access network equipment, etc.
  • the DU 2101 and the CU 2102 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the CU 2102 is the control center of the access network equipment, which can also be called a processing unit, and is mainly used to complete the baseband processing function.
  • the CU 2102 may be used to control the access network device to perform the operation flow of the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the access network device 210 may include one or more radio frequency units, one or more DUs, and one or more CUs.
  • the DU may include at least one processor 21013 and at least one memory 21014
  • the radio unit may include at least one antenna 21011 and at least one radio frequency unit 21012
  • the CU may include at least one processor 21022 and at least one memory 21021 .
  • a unit in any of the above apparatuses may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, eg, one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or, one or more Multiple microprocessors (digital singnal processors, DSPs), or, one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms.
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • DSPs digital singnal processors
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • a unit in the apparatus can be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler
  • the processing element can be a processor, such as a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), or other processors that can invoke programs.
  • these units can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
  • SOC system-on-a-chip
  • the above unit for receiving is an interface circuit of the device for receiving signals from other devices.
  • the receiving unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices.
  • the above unit for sending is an interface circuit of the device for sending signals to other devices.
  • the sending unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices.
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably.
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • And/or which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are an “or” relationship.
  • At least one item(s) below” or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s).
  • At least one of A, B or C includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC.
  • ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects degree, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application may be provided as a method, a system, or a computer program product. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including, but not limited to, disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
  • computer-usable storage media including, but not limited to, disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.
  • These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory result in an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions
  • the apparatus implements the functions specified in the flow or flow of the flowcharts and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A communication method and apparatus. The method comprises: a UE working in a first SSSG within an active time of a first DRX cycle; and the UE being switched from the first SSSG to a second SSSG at the beginning of a non-active time of the first DRX cycle till a time for monitoring a WUS within the non-active time of the first DRX cycle. By using the method and apparatus in the embodiments of the present application, a UE can be switched between different SSSGs.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device
相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
本申请要求在2021年03月31日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110349761.8、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202110349761.8 and the application title "a communication method and device" filed with the China Patent Office on March 31, 2021, the entire contents of which are incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
背景技术Background technique
目前,引入非连续接收(discontinuous reception,DRX)机制后,用户设备(user equipment,UE)在DRX激活时间,按照搜索空间集(search space set,SS set)的配置,监听物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH);在DRX非激活时间内,UE不再监听PDCCH,从而节省UE的功耗。At present, after the discontinuous reception (DRX) mechanism is introduced, the user equipment (UE) monitors the physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel) according to the configuration of the search space set (search space set, SS set) during the DRX activation time. downlink control channel, PDCCH); during the inactive time of DRX, the UE no longer monitors the PDCCH, thereby saving the power consumption of the UE.
为了进一步节省UE的功耗,引入动态搜索空间集组(search space set group,SSSG)切换的方案。该方案包括:将预先配置给UE的多个SS set,划分为多个SSSG,每个SSSG中包括一个或多个SS set。UE可以在不同的SSSG之间切换。例如,在一种可能的实现方式中,UE在接收到切换命令之前,UE按照SSSG1中包括的SS set,监听PDCCH。后续,UE接收到切换命令,UE将停止按照SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH,切换到按照SSSG2中包括的SS set,监听PDCCH。在引入SSSG之前,UE在DRX的激活时间,在激活带宽部分(bandwidth part,BWP)上,需要按照所配置的所有SS set,监听PDCCH,而采用上述SSSG切换方案之后,UE仅需按照部分SS set,监听PDCCH,从而节省UE的功耗。如何在不同SSSG间切换,是本申请实施例待解决的技术问题。In order to further save the power consumption of the UE, a dynamic search space set group (SSSG) switching scheme is introduced. The solution includes: dividing multiple SS sets pre-configured to the UE into multiple SSSGs, and each SSSG includes one or more SS sets. The UE can switch between different SSSGs. For example, in a possible implementation manner, before the UE receives the handover command, the UE monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set included in the SSSG1. Subsequently, when the UE receives the handover command, the UE will stop monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, and switch to monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set included in SSSG2. Before the introduction of SSSG, at the activation time of DRX, the UE needs to monitor the PDCCH according to all the configured SS sets on the activation bandwidth part (BWP). set, monitor the PDCCH, thereby saving the power consumption of the UE. How to switch between different SSSGs is a technical problem to be solved in the embodiments of the present application.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,以在不同的SSSG间切换。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus for switching between different SSSGs.
第一方面,提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:在第一DRX周期的激活时间,终端设备工作在第一SSSG;在所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始至所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间内用于WUS的时间之前,所述终端设备由所述第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。可选的,所述第二SSSG中包括用于监听WUS的搜索空间集,在所述第一DRX的非激活时间,所述终端设备根据所述搜索空间集,监听所述WUS。In a first aspect, a communication method is provided, the method comprising: at an activation time of a first DRX cycle, a terminal device operates in a first SSSG; and from an inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the first DRX cycle The terminal device is handed over from the first SSSG to the second SSSG before the time used for WUS within the inactive time. Optionally, the second SSSG includes a search space set for monitoring the WUS, and at the inactive time of the first DRX, the terminal device monitors the WUS according to the search space set.
采用上述第一方面的方案,终端设备在DRX周期的非激活时间,终端设备可以切换到第二SSSG,该第二SSSG中可以包括用于监听WUS的搜索空间,从而使得UE在DRX周期的非激活时间,可以监听到WUS,WUS可以实现其功能,节省UE功耗。With the solution of the first aspect, the terminal device can switch to the second SSSG during the inactive time of the DRX cycle, and the second SSSG can include a search space for monitoring the WUS, so that the UE can switch to the second SSSG during the inactive time of the DRX cycle. During the activation time, the WUS can be monitored, and the WUS can realize its function and save the power consumption of the UE.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二SSSG为协议定义的,或者网络设备配置的。In a possible design, the second SSSG is defined by a protocol or configured by a network device.
在上述设计中,上述第二SSSG可以通过协议定义或者网络设备配置,可以认为是预先配置的默认的SSSG。在满足切换条件时,终端设备直接切换到上述默认的第二SSSG, 终端设备无需做判断,节省终端设备的功耗。In the above design, the above-mentioned second SSSG may be defined by a protocol or configured by a network device, and may be considered as a pre-configured default SSSG. When the switching condition is satisfied, the terminal device directly switches to the above-mentioned default second SSSG, the terminal device does not need to make a judgment, and the power consumption of the terminal device is saved.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二SSSG包括仅用于监听所述WUS的搜索空间集。In one possible design, the second SSSG includes a set of search spaces only for listening to the WUS.
在上述设计中,上述第二SSSG可以为特定的SSSG,该特定的SSSG仅包括用于监听WUS的搜索空间集,不再包括其它类型的搜索空间集。In the above design, the above-mentioned second SSSG may be a specific SSSG, and the specific SSSG only includes a search space set for monitoring the WUS, and does not include other types of search space sets.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置至少一个SSSG;所述终端设备确定所述第二SSSG,所确定的所述第二SSSG属于所述至少一个SSSG。In a possible design, the method further includes: the terminal device receives configuration information from a network device, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG; the terminal device determines the second SSSG, and the determined The second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
第二方面,提供一种通信方法,该第二方面的有益效果可参见上述第一方面,包括:在第一非连续接收DRX周期的激活时间,网络设备确定终端设备工作在第一搜索空间集组SSSG;在所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始至所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间内用于监听唤醒信号WUS的时间之前,所述网络设备确定终端设备由所述第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。A second aspect provides a communication method, and the beneficial effects of the second aspect can be found in the first aspect, including: at the activation time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle, the network device determines that the terminal device operates in the first search space set Group SSSG; from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the time for monitoring the wake-up signal WUS within the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, the network device determines that the terminal device is operated by the first SSSG Switch to the second SSSG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:所述第二SSSG中包括用于监听WUS的搜索空间集,在所述第一DRX的非激活时间,所述网络设备根据所述搜索空间集,发送所述WUS。In a possible design, the method further includes: the second SSSG includes a search space set for monitoring WUS, and at the inactive time of the first DRX, the network device performs the search according to the search space set, send the WUS.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二SSSG为协议定义的,或者,所述网络设备确定的。In a possible design, the second SSSG is defined by a protocol, or determined by the network device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二SSSG中包括仅用于监听WUS的搜索空间集。In a possible design, the second SSSG includes a search space set only for monitoring WUS.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置至少一个SSSG,所述第二SSSG属于所述至少一个SSSG。In a possible design, the method further includes: the network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG, and the second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
第三方面,提供一种通信方法,包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于监听唤醒信号WUS的搜索空间集的配置信息,所述搜索空间集的配置信息中包括用于确定搜索空间集组SSSG的配置信息,或者,所述搜索空间集的配置信息不包括用于确定所述SSSG的配置信息;在第一非连续接收DRX周期的非激活时间内,所述终端工作于任一SSSG,所述终端设备根据所述搜索空间集,监听所述WUS。In a third aspect, a communication method is provided, comprising: a terminal device receiving configuration information of a search space set for monitoring a wake-up signal WUS from a network device, where the configuration information of the search space set includes a search space set group for determining a search space set. The configuration information of the SSSG, or the configuration information of the search space set does not include the configuration information for determining the SSSG; during the inactive time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle, the terminal works in any SSSG, The terminal device monitors the WUS according to the search space set.
通过上述第三方面的方案,不限制用于监听WUS的搜索空间集关联的SSSG,在DRX周期的非激活时间,无论UE工作于任何SSSG,都可以根据上述用于监听WUS的搜索空间集监听WUS,从而使得UE在非激活时间,可以监听到WUS,节省UE功耗。Through the solution of the third aspect, the SSSG associated with the search space set used for monitoring WUS is not limited. During the inactive time of the DRX cycle, no matter the UE works in any SSSG, it can monitor the search space set according to the above search space set for monitoring WUS. WUS, so that the UE can monitor the WUS during the inactive time, saving the power consumption of the UE.
第四方面,提供一种通信方法,包括:终端设备确定待切换到的SSSG;In a fourth aspect, a communication method is provided, including: a terminal device determining an SSSG to be switched to;
所述终端设备根据所述SSSG的类型,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,所述SSSG的类型包括空SSSG或非空SSSG,所述空SSSG指所述SSSG中不存在物理下行控制信道PDCCH监听时机或候选PDCCH;所述终端设备根据所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,切换到所述SSSG。The terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, where the type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG, and the empty SSSG means that there is no physical downlink control channel in the SSSG PDCCH monitoring timing or candidate PDCCH; the terminal device switches to the SSSG according to the time required for switching to the SSSG.
采用上述第四方面的方案,UE考虑切换到的SSSG的类型,确定切换所述SSSG所需要的时间不同,从而使得生效时延可满足不同场景的需求,提高系统性能。With the solution of the fourth aspect, the UE considers the type of the SSSG to be switched to, and determines that the time required for switching the SSSG is different, so that the effective delay can meet the requirements of different scenarios and improve the system performance.
在一种可能的设计中,在满足第一条件时,所述终端设备确定待切换到的SSSG,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是指所述终端设备满足所述第一条件的时间与所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG时间的间隔;In a possible design, when the first condition is satisfied, the terminal device determines the SSSG to be switched to, and the time required for switching to the SSSG refers to the time when the terminal device satisfies the first condition. the interval between the time and the time when the terminal device switches to the SSSG;
其中,所述第一条件包括:所述终端设备接收到来自网络设备的下行控制信息DCI,该DCI用于指示所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,所述终端设备根据切换前的SSSG中的搜索空间集监听PDCCH的时长达到第一时长;或者,所述终端设备根据切换前的 SSSG中的搜索空间集监听到DCI。The first condition includes: the terminal device receives downlink control information DCI from the network device, where the DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or, the terminal device according to the SSSG before switching The duration of monitoring the PDCCH in the search space set in the SSSG reaches the first duration; or, the terminal device monitors the DCI according to the search space set in the SSSG before handover.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备根据所述SSSG的类型,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:所述SSSG的类型为非空SSSG,所述第一条件为所述终端设备接收到来自网络设备的DCI,所述终端设备根据所述DCI调度的物理下行共享信道PDSCH或物理上行共享信道PUSCH,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者,In a possible design, the terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, including: the type of the SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, and the first condition is the The terminal device receives the DCI from the network device, and the terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH scheduled by the DCI; or,
所述SSSG的类型为空SSSG,所述终端设备根据第一子载波间隔与时间参数的对应关系,确定所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,或者,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间为协议预定义的或者网络设备配置的。The type of the SSSG is an empty SSSG, and the terminal device determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG according to the correspondence between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, or the time required for the handover to the SSSG The time is predefined by the protocol or configured by the network device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备根据所述DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:所述终端设备根据所述PDSCH对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈的时间单元偏移,确定所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者所述终端设备根据被调度的所述PUSCH的时间单元偏移,确定所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间。In a possible design, the terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI, including: the terminal device according to the hybrid automatic repeat request corresponding to the PDSCH The time unit offset fed back by HARQ determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG; or the terminal device determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG according to the time unit offset of the scheduled PUSCH time.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备根据所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,切换到所述SSSG,包括:在满足所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,无论所述HARQ反馈为肯定确认或否定确认,所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,在满足所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,当所述HARQ反馈为肯定确认时,所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG。In a possible design, the terminal device switching to the SSSG according to the time required for switching to the SSSG includes: when or after the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied, Regardless of whether the HARQ feedback is a positive acknowledgment or a negative acknowledgment, the terminal device switches to the SSSG; or, when the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied or after, when the HARQ feedback is a positive acknowledgment , the terminal device switches to the SSSG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一子载波间隔为所述终端设备满足所述第一条件时激活的带宽部分BWP的子载波间隔。In a possible design, the first subcarrier spacing is the subcarrier spacing of the bandwidth part BWP activated when the terminal device satisfies the first condition.
在一种可能的设计中,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数确定的;或者,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数与所述网络设备指示的用于调度PDSCH的最小调度偏移值两者中的较大值确定的。In a possible design, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter; or, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter and the It is determined by the larger value of the minimum scheduling offset value indicated by the network device for scheduling the PDSCH.
第五方面,提供一种通信方法,该第五方面的有益效果可参见上述第四方面,包括:网络设备确定终端设备待切换到的搜索空间集组SSSG;所述网络设备根据所述SSSG的类型,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,所述SSSG的类型包括空SSSG或非空SSSG,所述空SSSG指所述SSSG中不存在物理下行控制信道PDCCH监听时机或候选PDCCH;所述网络设备根据所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG。A fifth aspect provides a communication method. For the beneficial effects of the fifth aspect, reference may be made to the fourth aspect, including: a network device determining a search space set group SSSG to which a terminal device is to be switched; Type, to determine the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG, the type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG, and the empty SSSG means that there is no physical downlink control channel PDCCH monitoring opportunity or candidate in the SSSG PDCCH; the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG according to the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG.
在一种可能的设计中,在满足第二条件时,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备待切换到的SSSG,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是指所述终端设备满足所述第二条件的时间与所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG时间的间隔;In a possible design, when the second condition is satisfied, the network device determines the SSSG to which the terminal device is to be switched, and the time required for switching to the SSSG means that the terminal device satisfies the The interval between the time of the second condition and the time when the terminal device switches to the SSSG;
其中,所述第二条件包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送下行控制信息DCI,所述DCI用于指示所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备根据切换前的SSSG中的搜索空间集监听PDCCH的时长达到第一时长;或者,所述网络设备通过切换前的SSSG发送DCI。The second condition includes: the network device sends downlink control information DCI to the terminal device, where the DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or, the network device determines that the terminal device The duration that the device monitors the PDCCH according to the search space set in the SSSG before the handover reaches the first duration; or, the network device sends the DCI through the SSSG before the handover.
在一种可能的设计中,所述网络设备根据所述SSSG的类型,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:所述SSSG的类型为非空SSSG,所述第二条件为所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送DCI,所述网络设备根据所述DCI调度的物理下行共享信道PDSCH或物理上行共享信道PUSCH,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间; 或者,所述SSSG的类型为空SSSG,所述网络设备根据第一子载波间隔与时间参数的对应关系,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,所述时间参数用于确定所述切换到所述SSSG的时间;或者,所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间为协议预定义的或者网络设备确定的。In a possible design, the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, including: the type of the SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, the second The condition is that the network device sends DCI to the terminal device, and the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or physical uplink shared channel PUSCH scheduled by the DCI ; Or, the type of the SSSG is an empty SSSG, and the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the correspondence between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, and the time parameter is used for determining the time for switching to the SSSG; or, the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is predefined by a protocol or determined by a network device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述网络设备根据所述DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:所述网络设备根据所述PDSCH对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈的时间单元偏移,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者所述网络设备根据被调度的所述PUSCH的时间单元偏移,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间。In a possible design, the network device determines, according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI, the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG, including: the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the PDSCH The time unit offset of the automatic retransmission request HARQ feedback determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or the network device determines the terminal device according to the time unit offset of the scheduled PUSCH The time required to switch to the SSSG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述网络设备根据所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG,包括:在满足所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,无论所述网络设备接收到的来自所述终端设备的HARQ反馈为肯定确定或否定确认,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,在满足所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,当所述网络设备接收到的来自所述终端设备的HARQ反馈为肯定确认时,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG。In a possible design, the network device determining, according to the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG, determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG, including: after the terminal device switches to the SSSG At or after the time required for the SSSG, regardless of whether the HARQ feedback received by the network device from the terminal device is a positive confirmation or a negative confirmation, the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG; or, at When the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is satisfied or after, when the HARQ feedback received by the network device from the terminal device is a positive confirmation, the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG. the SSSG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一子载波间隔为所述网络设备满足所述第二条件时所述终端设备激活的带宽部分BWP的子载波间隔。In a possible design, the first subcarrier spacing is the subcarrier spacing of the bandwidth part BWP activated by the terminal device when the network device satisfies the second condition.
在一种可能的设计中,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数确定的;或者,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数与所述网络设备指示的用于调度PDSCH的最小调度偏移值两者中的较大值确定的。In a possible design, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter; or, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter and the It is determined by the larger value of the minimum scheduling offset value indicated by the network device for scheduling the PDSCH.
第六方面,提供一种装置,包括实现上述第一方面、第三方面、或第四方面中任一方面的单元。In a sixth aspect, an apparatus is provided, comprising a unit for implementing any one of the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fourth aspect.
第七方面,提供一种装置,包括实现上述第二方面、或第五方面的单元。In a seventh aspect, an apparatus is provided, comprising a unit for implementing the above-mentioned second aspect or the fifth aspect.
第八方面,提供一种装置,包括处理器和接口电路,接口电路用于接收来自该通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至该处理器或将来自该处理器的信号发送给该通信装置之外的其它通信装置,该处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现前述第一方面、第三方面、或第四方面任一方面的实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, a device is provided, comprising a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit to the processor or send signals from the processor to the For a communication device other than the communication device, the processor is used to implement the method in the implementation manner of any one of the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fourth aspect by using a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
第九方面,提供一种装置,包括处理器和接口电路,接口电路用于接收来自该通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至该处理器或将来自该处理器的信号发送给该通信装置之外的其它通信装置,该处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现前述第二方面、或第五方面的实现方式中的方法。A ninth aspect provides a device comprising a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit to the processor or send signals from the processor to the For other communication devices other than the communication device, the processor is used to implement the method in the implementation manner of the foregoing second aspect or the fifth aspect by using a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
第十方面,提供一种系统,包括前述第六方面或第八方面的装置,和前述第七方面或第九方面的装置。According to a tenth aspect, a system is provided, comprising the apparatus of the aforementioned sixth aspect or the eighth aspect, and the aforementioned apparatus of the seventh aspect or the ninth aspect.
第十一方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当该计算机程序或指令被执行时,实现前述第一方面至第五方面的任一种方面的实现方式中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, and a computer program or instruction is stored in the computer-readable storage medium. When the computer program or instruction is executed, any of the foregoing first to fifth aspects is realized. A method in an implementation of an aspect.
第十二方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当该指令被运行时,实现前述第一方面至第五方面的任一种方面的实现方式中的方法。A twelfth aspect provides a computer program product comprising instructions that, when executed, implement the method in the implementation of any one of the foregoing first to fifth aspects.
第十三方面,提供一种电路系统,该电路系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现前述第一方面至第五方面描述的任一方面的方法。该电路系统可以由芯片构成,也可 以包含芯片和其他分立器件。A thirteenth aspect provides a circuit system, the circuit system includes a processor, and may further include a memory, for implementing the method of any one of the foregoing first to fifth aspects. The circuitry may consist of chips or may contain chips and other discrete devices.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的网络架构的示意图;1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2a,图2b,图2c和图2d为本申请实施例提供的协议栈的示意图;Fig. 2a, Fig. 2b, Fig. 2c and Fig. 2d are schematic diagrams of a protocol stack provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的DRX机制的示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of a DRX mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的DRX周期的示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of a DRX cycle provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的UE下行业务的DRX机制的流程图;FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the DRX mechanism of the UE downlink service provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的基于PDCCH的WUS的示意图;6 is a schematic diagram of a PDCCH-based WUS provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的基于DCI的PDCCH跳过方案的示意图;7 is a schematic diagram of a DCI-based PDCCH skipping scheme provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8、图9和图10为本申请实施例提供的动态SSSG切换的示意图;Figure 8, Figure 9 and Figure 10 are schematic diagrams of dynamic SSSG switching provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11和图12为本申请实施例提供的一种场景示意图;11 and 12 are schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例一提供的通信方法的流程图;13 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by Embodiment 1 of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例一提供的SSSG切换的示意图;14 is a schematic diagram of SSSG handover provided by Embodiment 1 of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例二提供的通信方法的流程图;FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the communication method provided by Embodiment 2 of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的SSSG切换的生效时延的示意图;16 is a schematic diagram of an effective delay of SSSG handover provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请实施例三提供的通信方法的流程图;17 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by Embodiment 3 of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的停止PDCCH监听的生效时延的示意图;18 is a schematic diagram of the effective delay for stopping PDCCH monitoring provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的装置的结构示意图;19 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图20为本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图21为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly and completely described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
图1为本申请实施例适用的一种网络架构。如图1所示,终端设备(比如终端1301或终端1302)可接入到无线网络,以通过无线网络获取外网(例如因特网)的服务,或者通过无线网络与其它设备通信,如可以与其它终端设备通信。该无线网络包括无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)和核心网(core network,CN),其中,RNA用于将终端设备接入到无线网络,CN用于对终端设备进行管理并提供与外网通信的网关。FIG. 1 is a network architecture to which this embodiment of the present application is applicable. As shown in FIG. 1, a terminal device (such as terminal 1301 or terminal 1302) can be connected to a wireless network to obtain services of an external network (such as the Internet) through the wireless network, or communicate with other devices through the wireless network, such as other Terminal device communication. The wireless network includes a radio access network (RAN) and a core network (core network, CN), wherein the RNA is used to access the terminal equipment to the wireless network, and the CN is used to manage the terminal equipment and provide The gateway for external network communication.
下面分别对图1中所涉及的终端设备、RAN和CN进行详细说明。The terminal equipment, RAN and CN involved in FIG. 1 will be described in detail below.
一、终端设备。1. Terminal equipment.
终端设备包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与核心网进行通信,与RAN交换语音和/或数据。该终端设备可以包括用户设备(user equipment,UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)终端设备、车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things,IoT)终端设备、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户 站(subscriber station)、移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。Terminal devices include devices that provide voice and/or data connectivity to users, and may include, for example, handheld devices with wireless connectivity, or processing devices connected to a wireless modem. The terminal equipment may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN. The terminal equipment may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device (D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle to everything (V2X) terminal equipment , Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber) station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user Agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
二、RAN。2. RAN.
RAN中可以包括一个或多个RAN设备,比如RAN设备1101、RAN设备1102。RAN设备与终端设备之间的接口可以为Uu接口(或称为空口)。当然,在未来通信中,这些接口的名称可以不变,或者也可以用其它名称代替,本申请对此不限定。The RAN may include one or more RAN devices, such as RAN device 1101 and RAN device 1102 . The interface between the RAN device and the terminal device may be a Uu interface (or called an air interface). Of course, in future communications, the names of these interfaces may remain unchanged, or may be replaced with other names, which are not limited in this application.
RAN设备即为将终端设备接入到无线网络的节点或设备,RAN设备又可以称为网络设备或基站。RAN设备例如包括但不限于:5G通信系统中的新一代基站(generation Node B,gNB)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统中演进型节点B(evolved node B,eNB)传输接收点(transmitting and receiving point,TRP)、发射点(transmitting point,TP)等。A RAN device is a node or device that accesses a terminal device to a wireless network, and the RAN device may also be referred to as a network device or a base station. For example, RAN equipment includes but is not limited to: a new generation base station (generation Node B, gNB) in a 5G communication system, an evolved node B (evolved node B, eNB) transmission and reception point ( transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting point (transmitting point, TP), etc.
(1)协议层结构。(1) Protocol layer structure.
RAN设备和终端设备之间的通信遵循第三代合作伙伴计划(3 rd generation partnership project,3GPP)组织定义的协议层结构,例如控制面协议层结构可以包括无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理层等协议层的功能;用户面协议层结构可以包括PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层和物理层等协议层的功能,在一种可能的实现中,PDCP层之上还可以包括业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层。 The communication between the RAN equipment and the terminal equipment follows the protocol layer structure defined by the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) organization. For example, the control plane protocol layer structure may include radio resource control (RRC) Layer, packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer, radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical layer and other protocol layer functions The user plane protocol layer structure may include the functions of the protocol layers such as the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the physical layer. In a possible implementation, the PDCP layer may also include a service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol) , SDAP) layer.
以网络设备和终端设备之间的数据传输为例,如图2a所示,数据传输需要经过用户面协议层,比如经过SDAP层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层、物理层,其中,SDAP层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层、物理层也可以统称为接入层。根据数据的传输方向分为发送或接收,上述每层又分为发送部分和接收部分。以下数据传输为例,参见图2a所示为下行数据在各层间传输示意图,图2a中向下的箭头表示数据发送,向上的箭头表示数据接收。PDCP层自上层取得数据后,会将数据传送到RLC层与MAC层,再由MAC层生成传输块,然后通过物理层进行无线传输。数据在各个层中进行相对应的封装,某一层从该层的上层收到的数据视为该层的服务数据单元(service data unit,SDU),经过层封装后成为PDU,再传递给下一个层。Taking data transmission between network equipment and terminal equipment as an example, as shown in Figure 2a, data transmission needs to go through the user plane protocol layer, such as SDAP layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical layer, among which, SDAP layer , PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical layer may also be collectively referred to as access layers. According to the transmission direction of data, it is divided into sending or receiving, and each layer is divided into sending part and receiving part. The following data transmission is taken as an example. Referring to FIG. 2a, a schematic diagram of downlink data transmission between layers is shown. The downward arrow in FIG. 2a indicates data transmission, and the upward arrow indicates data reception. After the PDCP layer obtains data from the upper layer, it will transmit the data to the RLC layer and the MAC layer, and then the MAC layer will generate a transport block, and then wirelessly transmit it through the physical layer. The data is encapsulated correspondingly in each layer. The data received by a certain layer from the upper layer of the layer is regarded as the service data unit (SDU) of the layer. After layer encapsulation, it becomes a PDU, and then passed to the lower layer. a layer.
示例性地,根据图2a还可以看出,终端设备还具有应用层和非接入层;其中,应用层可以用于向终端设备中所安装的应用程序提供服务,比如,终端设备接收到的下行数据可以由物理层依次传输到应用层,进而由应用层提供给应用程序;又比如,应用层可以获取应用程序产生的数据,并将数据依次传输到物理层,发送给其它通信装置。非接入层可以用于转发用户数据,比如将从应用层接收到的上行数据转发给SDAP层或者将从SDAP层接收到的下行数据转发给应用层。Exemplarily, according to Fig. 2a, it can also be seen that the terminal device also has an application layer and a non-access layer; wherein, the application layer can be used to provide services to applications installed in the terminal device, for example, the terminal device receives Downlink data can be sequentially transmitted from the physical layer to the application layer, and then provided by the application layer to the application program; for another example, the application layer can obtain the data generated by the application program, transmit the data to the physical layer in turn, and send it to other communication devices. The non-access layer can be used for forwarding user data, for example, forwarding the uplink data received from the application layer to the SDAP layer or forwarding the downlink data received from the SDAP layer to the application layer.
(2)集中式单元(central unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)。(2) Centralized unit (central unit, CU) and distributed unit (distributed unit, DU).
本申请实施例中,RAN设备可以包括CU和DU,多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。作为示例,CU和DU之间的接口可以称为F1接口,其中,控制面(control panel,CP)接口可以为F1-C,用户面(user panel,UP)接口可以为F1-U。CU和DU可以根据无线网络的协议层划分:比如图2b所示,PDCP层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,PDCP层以下协议层(例如RLC层和MAC层等)的功能设置在DU;又比如图2c所示,PDCP层 以上协议层的功能设置在CU,PDCP层及以下协议层的功能设置在DU。In this embodiment of the present application, a RAN device may include a CU and a DU, and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU. As an example, an interface between a CU and a DU may be referred to as an F1 interface, wherein a control plane (control panel, CP) interface may be an F1-C, and a user plane (user panel, UP) interface may be an F1-U. The CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network: for example, as shown in Figure 2b, the functions of the PDCP layer and above are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP layer (for example, the RLC layer and the MAC layer, etc.) are set in the DU; For another example, as shown in FIG. 2c, the functions of the protocol layers above the PDCP layer are set in the CU, and the functions of the PDCP layer and the following protocol layers are set in the DU.
示例性地,CU的功能可以由一个实体来实现,或者也可以由不同的实体来实现。例如,如图2d所示,可以对CU的功能进行进一步切分,即将控制面和用户面分离并通过不同实体来实现,分别为控制面CU实体(即CU-CP实体)和用户面CU实体(即CU-UP实体)。该CU-CP实体和CU-UP实体可以与DU相耦合,共同完成RAN设备的功能。Exemplarily, the functions of the CU may be implemented by one entity, or may also be implemented by different entities. For example, as shown in Figure 2d, the functions of the CU can be further divided, that is, the control plane and the user plane can be separated and implemented by different entities, namely the control plane CU entity (ie the CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity. (ie CU-UP entity). The CU-CP entity and the CU-UP entity can be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the functions of the RAN device.
三、CN。3. CN.
CN中可以包括一个或多个CN设备,例如,CN设备120。以5G通信系统为例,CN中可以包括接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元、统一数据管理(unified data management,UDM)网元、和应用功能(application function,AF)网元等。One or more CN devices, eg, CN device 120, may be included in the CN. Taking the 5G communication system as an example, the CN may include access and mobility management function (AMF) network elements, session management function (SMF) network elements, and user plane functions (user plane functions). , UPF) network element, policy control function (policy control function, PCF) network element, unified data management (unified data management, UDM) network element, and application function (application function, AF) network element, etc.
应理解,图1所示的通信系统中各个设备的数量仅作为示意,本申请实施例并不限于此,实际应用中在通信系统中还可以包括更多的终端设备、更多的RAN设备,还可以包括其它设备。It should be understood that the number of each device in the communication system shown in FIG. 1 is only for illustration, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this. In practical applications, the communication system may also include more terminal devices and more RAN devices. Other devices may also be included.
上述图1所示的网络架构可以适用于各种无线接入技术(radio access technology,RAT)的通信系统中,例如可以是4G(或者称为LTE)通信系统,也可以是5G(或者称为新空口(new radio,NR))通信系统,也可以是LTE通信系统与5G通信系统之间的过渡系统,该过渡系统也可以称为4.5G通信系统,当然也可以是未来的通信系统中,例如6G通信系统。本申请实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着通信网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。The network architecture shown in FIG. 1 above can be applied to communication systems of various radio access technologies (RATs), such as 4G (or LTE) communication systems, or 5G (or 5G (or referred to as LTE) communication systems. The new radio (NR) communication system can also be a transition system between the LTE communication system and the 5G communication system. For example, 6G communication system. The network architecture and service scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and do not constitute limitations on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application. The evolution of the network architecture and the emergence of new service scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
下面先对本申请实施例所涉及的相关技术特征进行解释说明。需要说明的是,这些解释是为了让本申请实施例更容易被理解,而不应该视为对本申请所要求的保护范围的限定。The related technical features involved in the embodiments of the present application are explained below first. It should be noted that these explanations are for the purpose of making the embodiments of the present application easier to understand, and should not be regarded as limitations on the protection scope claimed by the present application.
一、物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)监听。1. Physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) monitoring.
PDCCH的作用之一就是用于承载上行或下行数据的调度信息,UE可周期性的监听PDCCH来获取调度信息。如果检测到PDCCH有调度信息,针对下行调度信息,UE可以根据调度信息确定物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)的资源位置,以接收PDSCH上携带的数据,针对上行调度信息,UE根据调度信息,确定物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)的资源位置,以发送PUSCH上携带的数据。One of the functions of the PDCCH is to carry the scheduling information of uplink or downlink data, and the UE can periodically monitor the PDCCH to obtain the scheduling information. If it is detected that the PDCCH has scheduling information, for the downlink scheduling information, the UE can determine the resource location of the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) according to the scheduling information to receive the data carried on the PDSCH. Scheduling information to determine the resource location of the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) to send data carried on the PUSCH.
在一种设计中,基站可以为UE配置至少一个搜索空间集(search space set,SS set)。UE基于SS set进行PDCCH监听。具体的,UE根据SS set的参数,进行PDCCH监听。例如,每个SS set的配置信息包括以下至少一项参数:In one design, the base station may configure at least one search space set (SS set) for the UE. The UE performs PDCCH monitoring based on the SS set. Specifically, the UE performs PDCCH monitoring according to the parameters of the SS set. For example, the configuration information of each SS set includes at least one of the following parameters:
-SS set标识,用于标识SS set;-SS set identifier, used to identify the SS set;
-与该SS set关联的控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)标识;其中,CORESET表示一个用于承载PDCCH的时频资源集,一个CORESET在频域上由若干个连续的或非连续的资源块(resource block,RB)组成,时域上由连续的1或多个符号组成。具体的,UE可以根据SS set的参数,例如监听周期、偏移或监 听图案等,在该SS set关联的CORESET上进行PDCCH监听。- The identification of the control resource set (control resource set, CORESET) associated with the SS set; wherein, CORESET represents a time-frequency resource set used to carry PDCCH, and a CORESET consists of several continuous or discontinuous resources in the frequency domain It is composed of a resource block (RB), which is composed of one or more consecutive symbols in the time domain. Specifically, the UE can perform PDCCH monitoring on the CORESET associated with the SS set according to the parameters of the SS set, such as the monitoring period, offset or monitoring pattern, etc.
-PDCCH监听周期Ks和偏移Os,Ks和Os的取值单位可以为NR中的时隙(slot)。-PDCCH monitoring period Ks and offset Os, the value unit of Ks and Os may be a time slot (slot) in NR.
-时隙内PDCCH监听图案(pattern),或者称为时隙内PDCCH监听符号,用于指示该SS set关联的CORESET在某个用于监听PDCCH的时隙内的起始符号。- In-slot PDCCH monitoring pattern (pattern), or referred to as intra-slot PDCCH monitoring symbol, used to indicate the start symbol of the CORESET associated with the SS set in a certain time slot for monitoring PDCCH.
-持续时间Ts,用于指示该SS set存在的连续的时隙的个数。其中,Ts小于Ks,Ts的取值可以为1个时隙。- Duration Ts, used to indicate the number of consecutive time slots in which the SS set exists. Wherein, Ts is less than Ks, and the value of Ts may be one time slot.
-聚合等级以及各聚合等级对应的候选PDCCH(PDCCH candidate)的个数。- The aggregation level and the number of candidate PDCCHs (PDCCH candidates) corresponding to each aggregation level.
-SS set类型指示,用于指示该SS set是公共搜索空间集(common search space set,CSS set),可以简称为CSS,或者是用户专用搜索空间集(UE-specific search space set,UE set),可以简称为USS。其中,若该SS set的类型为CSS,基站还会配置在候选PDCCH的位置监听的DCI格式(format),例如,可以为DCI格式0_0、DCI格式1_0、DCI格式2_0、DCI格式2_1、DCI格式2_2、DCI格式2_3、DCI格式2_4、DCI格式2_5或DCI格式2_6等。若该SS set的类型为USS,则基站也会配置在候选PDCCH的位置监听的DCI格式,例如,可以为DCI格式0_0、DCI格式1_0、DCI格式0_1、DCI格式1_1、DCI格式0_2、DCI格式1_2、DCI格式3_0、或DCI格式3_1等。-SS set type indication, used to indicate that the SS set is a common search space set (common search space set, CSS set), which can be abbreviated as CSS, or a user-specific search space set (UE-specific search space set, UE set) , which can be abbreviated as USS. Wherein, if the type of the SS set is CSS, the base station will also configure the DCI format (format) monitored at the position of the candidate PDCCH, for example, DCI format 0_0, DCI format 1_0, DCI format 2_0, DCI format 2_1, DCI format 2_2, DCI format 2_3, DCI format 2_4, DCI format 2_5, or DCI format 2_6, etc. If the type of the SS set is USS, the base station will also configure the DCI format monitored at the position of the candidate PDCCH, for example, DCI format 0_0, DCI format 1_0, DCI format 0_1, DCI format 1_1, DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_2, DCI format 3_0, or DCI format 3_1, etc.
在一种可能的实现方式中,UE可以根据上述参数中的PDCCH监听周期、偏移,以及In a possible implementation manner, the UE may monitor the PDCCH period, offset, and
时隙内PDCCH监听图案等,确定PDCCH监听时机(monitoring occasion,MO)。The PDCCH monitoring pattern in the time slot, etc., determines the PDCCH monitoring occasion (MO).
举例来说,某个SS set参数中的PDCCH监听周期为4个时隙,偏移为0,持续时间为1个时隙,PDCCH监听图案中包括一个时隙中的前3个符号,与SS set关联的CORESET的符号数为1个符号。则UE以4个时隙为PDCCH监听周期,在该SS set相关联的CORESET上进行PDCCH监听。在每个PDCCH监听周期内,按照下述方案,监听PDCCH:由于偏移为0,可以确定在每个PDCCH监听周期中的首个时隙进行PDCCH监听,持续时间为1个时隙,可以确定仅在每个PDCCH监听周期中的首个时隙内进行PDCCH监听。由于PDCCH监听图案为一个时隙内的前3个符号,则UE可以在每个PDCCH监听周期中有3个监听时机,即在首个时隙的前3个符号进行PDCCH监听。根据上述SS set参数所确定的PDCCH监听时机,可参见图3中的黑色填充部分。For example, the PDCCH monitoring period in a certain SS set parameter is 4 time slots, the offset is 0, and the duration is 1 time slot. The number of symbols of the CORESET associated with set is 1 symbol. Then the UE uses 4 time slots as the PDCCH monitoring period, and performs PDCCH monitoring on the CORESET associated with the SS set. In each PDCCH monitoring period, the PDCCH is monitored according to the following scheme: Since the offset is 0, it can be determined that PDCCH monitoring is performed in the first time slot in each PDCCH monitoring period, and the duration is 1 time slot, which can be determined PDCCH monitoring is performed only in the first time slot in each PDCCH monitoring period. Since the PDCCH monitoring pattern is the first three symbols in a time slot, the UE can have three monitoring opportunities in each PDCCH monitoring period, that is, the PDCCH monitoring is performed in the first three symbols of the first time slot. For the PDCCH monitoring timing determined according to the above-mentioned SS set parameters, please refer to the black filled part in FIG. 3 .
可以理解的是,如果PDCCH监听时机比较密集,比如PDCCH监听周期为1个时隙,UE在每个时隙都要监听PDCCH,一旦有数据传输,基站可以很快向UE调度,这样有利于降低业务的传输时延,但是UE频繁的监听PDCCH会带来UE功耗的浪费。如果PDCCH监听时机比较稀疏,比如PDCCH监听周期较大,可以减少UE功耗,但是会增加业务的传输时延。It can be understood that if the PDCCH monitoring timing is relatively dense, for example, the PDCCH monitoring period is 1 time slot, the UE must monitor the PDCCH in each time slot. Once there is data transmission, the base station can quickly schedule the UE, which is conducive to reducing the The transmission delay of the service, but the frequent monitoring of the PDCCH by the UE will lead to waste of the power consumption of the UE. If the PDCCH monitoring timing is sparse, for example, the PDCCH monitoring period is relatively long, the power consumption of the UE can be reduced, but the service transmission delay will be increased.
二、节省UE功耗的方法。2. A method for saving UE power consumption.
1、一种常用的节省UE功耗的方式就是采用连续态非连续接收(connected mode discontinuous reception,C-DRX),可以简称为DRX。DRX机制可控制UE监听PDCCH的行为。如果没有DRX机制,UE会一直监听PDCCH,检测是否有来自基站的指示信息。然而现实中很多时候,UE并不是一直和基站进行有效信息的交互,不会总是执行上行或下载业务,通话时也不会一直有语音数据的传输。如果在UE和基站之间没有数据交互的时候,UE还持续的监听PDCCH,显然是费电的。因此,在保证数据有效传输的前提下,设计的一种节省UE电量的机制就是DRX。当配置DRX时,可以让UE周期性的在某些 时候进入睡眠状态(sleep mode),UE不需要持续的监听PDCCH,在需要监听的时候,则从睡眠状态唤醒(wake up),这样就可以使UE达到省电的目的。虽然这样做对数据传输的时延有一定的影响。但是如果将时延控制在可接受的用户体验范围内,那么执行DRX对节省功耗是很有意义的。1. A common way to save UE power consumption is to use continuous discontinuous reception (connected mode discontinuous reception, C-DRX), which can be referred to as DRX for short. The DRX mechanism can control the behavior of the UE to monitor the PDCCH. If there is no DRX mechanism, the UE will always monitor the PDCCH to detect whether there is indication information from the base station. In reality, however, in many cases, the UE does not always interact with the base station for effective information, does not always perform uplink or download services, and does not always transmit voice data during a call. If there is no data interaction between the UE and the base station, the UE continues to monitor the PDCCH, which obviously consumes electricity. Therefore, under the premise of ensuring effective data transmission, a mechanism designed to save UE power is DRX. When configuring DRX, the UE can periodically enter the sleep mode (sleep mode) at certain times. The UE does not need to continuously monitor the PDCCH. Make the UE achieve the purpose of power saving. Although doing so has a certain impact on the delay of data transmission. However, if the latency is controlled within an acceptable user experience range, it makes sense to perform DRX to save power.
在DRX机制中,UE可以根据基站配置的DRX周期,周期性监听PDCCH。如图4所示,DRX周期由激活时间(active time)和非激活时间(non-active time)这两个时间段组成。UE在激活时间内,处于唤醒态,监听PDCCH。UE在非激活时间内,处于休眠态,不监听PDCCH,以减少功耗。这里,休眠态仅是针对监听PDCCH而言,表示UE不监听PDCCH。处于休眠态的UE依然处于RRC连接态,能够在Uu空口上与基站进行通信。In the DRX mechanism, the UE can periodically monitor the PDCCH according to the DRX cycle configured by the base station. As shown in Figure 4, the DRX cycle consists of two time periods, active time and non-active time. During the activation time, the UE is in an awake state and monitors the PDCCH. During the inactive time, the UE is in a dormant state and does not monitor the PDCCH to reduce power consumption. Here, the dormant state is only for monitoring the PDCCH, indicating that the UE does not monitor the PDCCH. The UE in the dormant state is still in the RRC connected state and can communicate with the base station on the Uu air interface.
需要说明的是,在DRX周期的非激活时间内,UE并不是所有的PDCCH都不监听的。在DRX周期的非激活时间内,UE不监听的PDCCH至少包括小区无线网络临时标识(cell-radio network temporary identifier,C-RNTI),取消指示无线网络临时标识(cancellation indication-radio network temporary identifier,CI-RNTI),配置调度无线网络临时标识(configured scheduled-radio network temporary identifier,CS-RNTI),抢占指示无线网络临时标识(Indication pre-emption-radio network temporary identifier,INT-RNTI),时隙格式指示无线网络临时标识(slot format indicator--radio network temporary identifier,SFI-RNTI),半永久激活CSI无线网络临时标识(activation of Semi-persistent CSI-radio network temporary identifier,SP-CSI-RNTI),PUCCH功率控制无线网络临时标识(PUCCH power control-radio network temporary identifier,TPC-PUCCH-RNTI),PUSCH功率控制无线网络临时标识(PUSCH power control-radio network temporary identifier,TPC-PUSCH-RNTI),SRS功率控制无线网络临时标识(SRS power control-radio network temporary identifier,TPC-SRS-RNTI)或可用性指示无线网络临时标识(availability indication-radio network temporary identifier,AI-RNTI)等加扰的PDCCH。即仅由上述RNTI加扰的PDCCH的监听是受DRX机制约束的,对于其它RNTI加扰的PDCCH的监听不受DRX机制约束。It should be noted that, during the inactive time of the DRX cycle, the UE does not monitor all PDCCHs. During the inactive time of the DRX cycle, the PDCCH that the UE does not monitor includes at least the cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), and the cancellation indication-radio network temporary identifier (CI) -RNTI), configuration scheduling wireless network temporary identifier (configured scheduled-radio network temporary identifier, CS-RNTI), preemption indication wireless network temporary identifier (Indication pre-emption-radio network temporary identifier, INT-RNTI), time slot format indication Wireless network temporary identifier (slot format indicator--radio network temporary identifier, SFI-RNTI), semi-permanent activation of CSI wireless network temporary identifier (activation of Semi-persistent CSI-radio network temporary identifier, SP-CSI-RNTI), PUCCH power control Wireless network temporary identifier (PUCCH power control-radio network temporary identifier, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), PUSCH power control-radio network temporary identifier (PUSCH power control-radio network temporary identifier, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), SRS power control wireless network Temporary identifier (SRS power control-radio network temporary identifier, TPC-SRS-RNTI) or availability indication wireless network temporary identifier (availability indication-radio network temporary identifier, AI-RNTI) scrambled PDCCH. That is, the monitoring of only the PDCCH scrambled by the above-mentioned RNTI is constrained by the DRX mechanism, and the monitoring of the PDCCH scrambled by other RNTIs is not constrained by the DRX mechanism.
在一种可能的实现方式中,可设置非连续接收激活定时器(drx-onDurationTimer),当drx-onDurationTimer在运行时,UE处于激活时间。为了降低数据的传输时延,在DRX中还提出了以下定时器:In a possible implementation manner, a discontinuous reception activation timer (drx-onDurationTimer) may be set, and when the drx-onDurationTimer is running, the UE is in the activation time. In order to reduce the data transmission delay, the following timers are also proposed in DRX:
(1)、非连续接收非活跃定时器(drx-Inactivity Timer)。(1) Discontinuous reception inactivity timer (drx-Inactivity Timer).
在大多数情况下,UE在某个PDCCH监听时机被调度来接收或发送数据后,很可能在接下来的几个时隙(slot)内也被继续调度,以完成一份较大数据量的数据的接收或发送。如果该UE已经进入休眠态,则该UE要等到下一个DRX周期再监听PDCCH获取资源调度来接收或发送后续数据。这会增加数据传输的时延。为了降低这个原因导致的延迟,DRX机制引入了一个定时器:drx-InactivityTimer。当UE监听并接收到一个用于调度新数据的PDCCH时,UE会开启(或重启)定时器drx-InactivityTimer。UE会在drx-InactivityTimer运行期间继续监听PDCCH,直到该定时器超时。可以看出,drx-InactivityTimer的引入,可确保UE在drx-InactivityTimer运行期间处于激活时间,接收接下来基站的调度,相当于对“激活时间”进行了扩展。如果UE连续接收到用于调度新数据的PDCCH,则UE会不断地重启drx-InactivityTimer,可能会使得UE在整个DRX周期都处于“激活时间”,即“激活时间”可能扩展至整个DRX周期。In most cases, after the UE is scheduled to receive or transmit data at a certain PDCCH listening opportunity, it is likely to be scheduled in the next few slots to complete a larger data volume. The reception or transmission of data. If the UE has entered the sleep state, the UE will wait until the next DRX cycle to monitor the PDCCH to obtain resource scheduling to receive or send subsequent data. This increases the latency of data transmission. In order to reduce the delay caused by this reason, the DRX mechanism introduces a timer: drx-InactivityTimer. When the UE monitors and receives a PDCCH for scheduling new data, the UE starts (or restarts) the timer drx-InactivityTimer. The UE will continue to monitor the PDCCH while the drx-InactivityTimer is running until the timer expires. It can be seen that the introduction of the drx-InactivityTimer can ensure that the UE is in the active time during the operation of the drx-InactivityTimer, and receives the scheduling of the next base station, which is equivalent to extending the "active time". If the UE continuously receives the PDCCH for scheduling new data, the UE will continuously restart the drx-InactivityTimer, which may cause the UE to be in the "active time" throughout the DRX cycle, that is, the "active time" may extend to the entire DRX cycle.
在一种可能的设计中,在DRX机制中,基站还可以在drx-Inactivity Timer运行期间, 向UE发送媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)控制元素(control element,CE)以提前终止drx-Inactivity Timer的计时。UE在接收到MAC CE信令后,结束剩余的drx-Inactivty Timer的计时,节省功耗。MAC CE信令终止drx-Inactivity Timer可以认为是使UE提前进入睡眠态的方式,所以可以节省UE功耗,但可能会增加调度时延。In a possible design, in the DRX mechanism, the base station may also send a media access control (media access control, MAC) control element (control element, CE) to the UE to terminate the drx in advance during the running of the drx-Inactivity Timer - Timing of the Inactivity Timer. After receiving the MAC CE signaling, the UE ends the timing of the remaining drx-Inactivty Timer to save power consumption. The termination of the drx-Inactivity Timer by the MAC CE signaling can be considered as a way to make the UE enter the sleep state in advance, so the power consumption of the UE can be saved, but the scheduling delay may be increased.
(2)、非连续接收往返定时器(drx-HARQ-RTT Timer,hybrid automatic repeat request-round trip time,HARQ-RTT)和非连续接收重传定时器(drx-Retransmission Timer)。(2), discontinuous reception round trip timer (drx-HARQ-RTT Timer, hybrid automatic repeat request-round trip time, HARQ-RTT) and discontinuous reception retransmission timer (drx-Retransmission Timer).
在NR系统中,基站为UE配置了混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request,HARQ)反馈的重传机制后,一种可能的HARQ工作方式是:基站根据HARQ反馈来决定是否重传下行数据。HARQ反馈可以为否定性确认(negtive acknowledgment,NACK)或肯定性确认(acknowledgment,ACK)。举例来说,如果下行数据a的HARQ反馈为NACK,则基站在接收到NACK之后,重传下行数据a,并在PDCCH下发用于调度下行数据a重传的资源。In the NR system, after the base station configures the retransmission mechanism of hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) feedback for the UE, a possible HARQ working mode is: the base station decides whether to retransmit downlink data according to the HARQ feedback . The HARQ feedback can be a negative acknowledgment (NACK) or an acknowledgment (ACK). For example, if the HARQ feedback of the downlink data a is NACK, after receiving the NACK, the base station retransmits the downlink data a, and issues resources for scheduling the retransmission of the downlink data a on the PDCCH.
当UE向基站发送的下行数据a的HARQ反馈为NACK时,UE之后需要接收基站下发的用于调度下行数据a重传的PDCCH。为了降低重传数据的传输时延,引入了drx-HARQ-RTT Timer和drx-Retransmission Timer。示例的,UE在利用PUCCH资源,向基站发送HARQ反馈时,启动drx-HARQ-RTT Timer。在drx-HARQ-RTT Timer超时时,且UE解码数据失败,即UE发送的HARQ反馈为NACK时,则启动drx-Retransmission Timer。在drx-Retransmission Timer的运行期间,UE处于激活时间,监听PDCCH,从而可避免UE要等待至下一个DRX周期的“激活时间”,才可以监听PDCCH,降低重传数据的传输时延。When the HARQ feedback of the downlink data a sent by the UE to the base station is NACK, the UE then needs to receive the PDCCH for scheduling the retransmission of the downlink data a sent by the base station. In order to reduce the transmission delay of retransmitted data, drx-HARQ-RTT Timer and drx-Retransmission Timer are introduced. Exemplarily, the UE starts the drx-HARQ-RTT Timer when sending HARQ feedback to the base station using the PUCCH resource. When the drx-HARQ-RTT Timer times out, and the UE fails to decode the data, that is, when the HARQ feedback sent by the UE is NACK, the drx-Retransmission Timer is started. During the operation of the drx-Retransmission Timer, the UE is in the activation time and monitors the PDCCH, thus avoiding that the UE has to wait until the "activation time" of the next DRX cycle before it can monitor the PDCCH and reduce the transmission delay of retransmitted data.
应当指出,上述是以下行数据为例,对drx-HARQ-RTT Timer和drx-Retransmission Timer进行描述的。实际上,针对下行业务和上行业务,可分别设置drx-HARQ-RTT Timer和drx-Retransmission Timer。其中,下行业务的定时器可称为drx-HARQ-RTT TimerDL和drx-Retransmission TimerDL。其工作过程可以为:UE发送下行业务的HARQ反馈时,开启drx-HARQ-RTT TimerDL,在下行业务解码失败,即发送的HARQ反馈为NACK时,开启drx-Retransmission TimerDL,在drx-Retransmission TimerDL的运行期间,UE处于激活时间。上行业务的定时器称为drx-HARQ-RTT TimerUL和drx-Retransmission TimerUL。其工作过程可以为:UE发送PUSCH以后,开启drx-HARQ-RTT TimerUL,drx-HARQ-RTT TimerUL超时,开启drx-Retransmission TimerUL,在drx-Retransmission TimerUL的运行期间,UE处于激活时间。It should be noted that the above is the following line data as an example to describe the drx-HARQ-RTT Timer and the drx-Retransmission Timer. In fact, for downlink services and uplink services, drx-HARQ-RTT Timer and drx-Retransmission Timer can be set respectively. Among them, the timers of downlink services may be called drx-HARQ-RTT TimerDL and drx-Retransmission TimerDL. Its working process can be: when the UE sends the HARQ feedback of the downlink service, the drx-HARQ-RTT TimerDL is turned on, and when the downlink service decoding fails, that is, when the sent HARQ feedback is NACK, the drx-Retransmission TimerDL is turned on, and the drx-Retransmission TimerDL is turned on. During operation, the UE is in active time. The timers for uplink services are called drx-HARQ-RTT TimerUL and drx-Retransmission TimerUL. The working process can be as follows: after the UE sends the PUSCH, the drx-HARQ-RTT TimerUL is turned on, the drx-HARQ-RTT TimerUL times out, and the drx-Retransmission TimerUL is turned on. During the operation of the drx-Retransmission TimerUL, the UE is in the activation time.
以下行业务为例,如图5所示,DRX机制中UE的处理流程,包括:UE在drx-onDurationTimer定时器运行期间监听PDCCH,如果在drx-onDurationTimer运行期间没有检测到调度初传的PDCCH,drx-InactivityTimer不会启动,则drx-onDurationTimer结束以后UE进入睡眠状态即non-active time,不监听PDCCH;如果UE检测到PDCCH调度新传的PDSCH,则开启或者重启drx-InactivityTimer,即每当UE有初传数据被调度,drx-InactivityTimer就被启动(或重启)一次,UE将一直位于active time直到该定时器超时,UE在drx-InactivityTimer运行期间监听PDCCH。UE按照接收到的调度信息接收PDSCH,UE反馈HARQ信息,开启该HARQ进程的drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL,在drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL结束后,若如果UE没有正确接收PDSCH,即反馈的HARQ信息为NACK时,则开启drx-RetransmissionTimerDL,UE在drx-RetransmissionTimerDL内 监听PDCCH,当UE检测到调度PDSCH的DCI时,无论drx-RetransmissionTimerDL是否超时,UE都会终止该drx-RetransmissionTimerDL。Taking the downlink service as an example, as shown in Figure 5, the processing flow of the UE in the DRX mechanism includes: the UE monitors the PDCCH during the running of the drx-onDurationTimer timer. drx-InactivityTimer will not be started, then after the end of drx-onDurationTimer, the UE enters the sleep state, that is, non-active time, and does not monitor the PDCCH; if the UE detects the newly transmitted PDSCH scheduled by the PDCCH, it will start or restart the drx-InactivityTimer, that is, whenever the UE When the first transmitted data is scheduled, the drx-InactivityTimer is started (or restarted) once, and the UE will remain in the active time until the timer expires, and the UE monitors the PDCCH during the operation of the drx-InactivityTimer. The UE receives the PDSCH according to the received scheduling information, the UE feeds back the HARQ information, and starts the drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL of the HARQ process. After the drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL ends, if the UE does not receive the PDSCH correctly, the feedback When the HARQ information is NACK, the drx-RetransmissionTimerDL is enabled, and the UE monitors the PDCCH in the drx-RetransmissionTimerDL. When the UE detects the DCI scheduling the PDSCH, the UE will terminate the drx-RetransmissionTimerDL regardless of whether the drx-RetransmissionTimerDL times out.
通过上述描述可知,当UE处于激活时间,即唤醒态时,以下定时器中的至少一个定时器在运行:drx-onDurationTimer、drx-InactivityTimer、drx-RetransmissionTimerDL、或drx-RetransmisionTimerUL等。为了便于理解,对上述几个定时器的功能进行描述,可参见下述表1所示。It can be seen from the above description that when the UE is in the active time, that is, the wake-up state, at least one of the following timers is running: drx-onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimerDL, or drx-RetransmisionTimerUL, etc. For ease of understanding, the functions of the above timers are described, as shown in Table 1 below.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2022080766-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022080766-appb-000001
应当指出,除了上述几个定时器之外,DRX机制的激活时间还可以包括以下至少一项运行期间:It should be pointed out that in addition to the above several timers, the activation time of the DRX mechanism may also include at least one of the following running periods:
随机接入竞争解决定时器(ra-Contention Resolutiontimer Timer)的运行期间,该定时器用于在随机接入过程中冲突解决;During the running of the random access contention resolution timer (ra-Contention Resolutiontimer Timer), the timer is used for conflict resolution in the random access process;
消息B响应窗口(msgB-ResponseWindow)运行期间,该消息B响应窗口用于2步(2-step)随机接入冲突解决;During the operation of the message B response window (msgB-ResponseWindow), the message B response window is used for 2-step (2-step) random access conflict resolution;
UE在PUCCH上发送了调度请求(scheduling request,SR)之后的等待期间;The waiting period after the UE sends a scheduling request (SR) on the PUCCH;
UE在成功接收到基于非竞争的随机接入的随机接入响应(random access response,RAR)之后还未收到指示新传的PDCCH期间。The UE has not received a PDCCH indicating a new transmission after successfully receiving a random access response (random access response, RAR) based on non-contention random access.
2、为了进一步节省UE的功耗,在DRX机制的基础上引入唤醒信号(wake up signal,WUS),即,在DRX的激活定时器(drx-on duration Timer)启动之前,基站可以向UE发送WUS,以通知UE是否启动drx-on duration Timer。2. In order to further save the power consumption of the UE, a wake up signal (WUS) is introduced on the basis of the DRX mechanism, that is, before the activation timer (drx-on duration Timer) of the DRX is started, the base station can send a message to the UE. WUS to inform the UE whether to start the drx-on duration Timer.
如图6所示,UE在drx-on Duration Timer启动之前的一个时间窗(该时间窗可称为WUS时间窗)内监听WUS。若监听到指示唤醒的WUS,则UE将启动激活定时器drx-on duration Timer,进行正常的激活期定时器内的操作,包括监听PDCCH;当UE检测到指示 不唤醒的WUS时,那么UE将不启动drx-on duration Timer,意味着UE设备在接下来的一个DRX周期内不会监听PDCCH,从而达到节省能耗的目的。As shown in FIG. 6 , the UE monitors the WUS within a time window before the drx-on Duration Timer starts (this time window may be referred to as the WUS time window). If the WUS indicating wake-up is monitored, the UE will start the activation timer drx-on duration Timer, and perform normal operations in the active period timer, including monitoring the PDCCH; when the UE detects the WUS indicating no wake-up, the UE will Not starting the drx-on duration Timer means that the UE device will not monitor the PDCCH in the next DRX cycle, so as to save energy.
关于WUS时间窗作如下说明:UE可以根据最小时间偏移(minimum offset)和PS-offset确定,该WUS时间窗。其中,上述最小时间偏移是UE发送给基站的,是指该WUS时间窗口的结束位置至drx-on Duration Timer开始位置的时间长度,上述PS-offset是基站发送给UE的,是指该WUS时间窗的开始位置至drx-on Duration Timer开始位置的时间长度。The following description is made about the WUS time window: the UE may determine the WUS time window according to the minimum time offset (minimum offset) and the PS-offset. The above-mentioned minimum time offset is sent by the UE to the base station, and refers to the time length from the end position of the WUS time window to the start position of the drx-on Duration Timer, and the above-mentioned PS-offset is sent by the base station to the UE, which refers to the WUS The length of time from the start of the time window to the start of the drx-on Duration Timer.
其中,WUS通过格式(format)2-6的DCI承载,该DCI可以采用节约能源-无线网络临时标识(power saving-radio network temporary identifier,PS-RNTI)加扰。DCI格式2-6的DCI可以承载多个WUS,每个WUS可以占用一个字段(该字段至少占用1比特)。一个WUS可以指示一个或多个UE是否唤醒。换句话说,多个UE可以复用同一个WUS。Wherein, WUS is carried by DCI in formats 2-6, and the DCI can be scrambled by using a power saving-radio network temporary identifier (PS-RNTI). The DCI of DCI formats 2-6 can carry multiple WUSs, and each WUS can occupy one field (the field occupies at least 1 bit). A WUS may indicate whether one or more UEs are awake. In other words, multiple UEs can reuse the same WUS.
3、基于DCI的PDCCH跳过方案(DCI based PDCCH skipping scheme)。3. DCI based PDCCH skipping scheme (DCI based PDCCH skipping scheme).
该方案还处于研究阶段,其核心思想是基站通过PDCCH指示UE在接下来的一个时间段内停止监听PDCCH,来节省UE功耗。不检测PDCCH的时间段可以是几个时隙,几毫秒,或者剩余的inactivity Timer对应的时间。本方案可以使UE睡眠较短的时间,既达到节省功耗的目的,又尽量降低了对时延的影响。如图7所示,UE在DRX周期的激活时间内,接收到不监听PDCCH的指示时,UE可以在某一个时间段内不再监听PDCCH。该时间段结束后,UE继续监听PDCCH。The solution is still in the research stage, and its core idea is that the base station instructs the UE to stop monitoring the PDCCH in the next time period through the PDCCH, so as to save the power consumption of the UE. The time period during which the PDCCH is not detected may be several time slots, several milliseconds, or the time corresponding to the remaining inactivity Timer. This solution can make the UE sleep for a short time, which not only achieves the purpose of saving power consumption, but also reduces the impact on the delay as much as possible. As shown in FIG. 7 , when the UE receives an instruction not to monitor the PDCCH within the activation time of the DRX cycle, the UE may no longer monitor the PDCCH within a certain period of time. After the period ends, the UE continues to monitor the PDCCH.
可选的,在该机制中,基站可以通过RRC信令向UE设备配置多个候选时间段用于不监听PDCCH,后续通过PDCCH指示上述多个候选时间段中的一个时间段。Optionally, in this mechanism, the base station may configure multiple candidate time periods to the UE through RRC signaling for not monitoring the PDCCH, and subsequently use the PDCCH to indicate one of the multiple candidate time periods.
需要说明的是,上述基于DCI的PDCCH跳过方案中,在上述不监听PDCCH的时间段内,UE不监听的PDCCH包括至少以下一项RNTI加扰的PDCCH:C-RNTI,调制和编码方式小区无线网络临时标识(modulation and coding scheme-C-RNTI,MCS-C-RNTI),CS-RNTI,SP-CSI-RNTI,CI-RNTI,INT-RNTI,SFI-RNTI,TPC-PUCCH-RNTI,TPC-PUSCH-RNTI,TPC-SRS-RNTI,或AI-RNTI等。It should be noted that, in the above-mentioned DCI-based PDCCH skipping scheme, in the above-mentioned time period when the UE does not monitor the PDCCH, the PDCCH that the UE does not monitor includes at least one of the following PDCCH scrambled by RNTI: C-RNTI, modulation and coding mode cell Wireless network temporary identification (modulation and coding scheme-C-RNTI, MCS-C-RNTI), CS-RNTI, SP-CSI-RNTI, CI-RNTI, INT-RNTI, SFI-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC -PUSCH-RNTI, TPC-SRS-RNTI, or AI-RNTI, etc.
4、动态搜索空间集组(dynamic search space set group,SSSG)切换。4. Dynamic search space set group (SSSG) switching.
如前文所述,基站可以为一个BWP配置多个SS set,可以将一个BWP内的SS set划分为多组。如图8所示,以划分为2组为例,该2组分别为SSSG1和SSSG2。UE可以在不同的SSSG间进行切换。比如,UE首先利用上述SSSG1,监听PDCCH。举例来说,SSSG1包括SS set1和SS set2,则UE可以根据SS set1和SS set2配置的参数,监听PDCCH。后续接收到切换命令,由SSSG1切换到SSSG2,则UE停止根据SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH,后续开始根据SSSG2的SS set监听PDCCH。举例来说,SSSG2包括SS set3和SS set4。则当UE接收到切换命令时,将停止根据SS set1和SS set2配置的参数,监听PDCCH,开始根据SS set3和SS set4配置的参数,监听PDCCH。As mentioned above, the base station can configure multiple SS sets for one BWP, and can divide the SS sets in one BWP into multiple groups. As shown in FIG. 8 , taking the division into two groups as an example, the two groups are SSSG1 and SSSG2 respectively. The UE can switch between different SSSGs. For example, the UE first monitors the PDCCH by using the above-mentioned SSSG1. For example, SSSG1 includes SS set1 and SS set2, and the UE can monitor the PDCCH according to the parameters configured by SS set1 and SS set2. After receiving the handover command, the UE switches from SSSG1 to SSSG2, then the UE stops monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, and then starts monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG2. For example, SSSG2 includes SS set3 and SS set4. Then when the UE receives the handover command, it will stop monitoring the PDCCH according to the parameters configured by SS set1 and SS set2, and start monitoring the PDCCH according to the parameters configured by SS set3 and SS set4.
以两组SSSG切换为例,动态切换SSSG的方式有以下几种,可参见图9。下述切换方式仅为示例性说明,并不作为对本申请实施例的限定。Taking the switching of two groups of SSSGs as an example, there are the following ways to dynamically switch the SSSGs, as shown in FIG. 9 . The following switching manners are only exemplary descriptions, and are not intended to limit the embodiments of the present application.
(1)、通过DCI的比特域显式指示。例如,该DCI的比特域指示为0,则UE根据SSSG0中的SS set监听PDCCH,停止根据SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH,即由SSSG1切换到SSSG0。或者,当该比特域指示为1,则UE根据SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH,停止根据SSSG0中的SS set监听PDCCH,即由SSSG0切换到SSSG1。(1) Explicitly indicate through the bit field of DCI. For example, if the bit field of the DCI indicates 0, the UE monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0, and stops monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, that is, switches from SSSG1 to SSSG0. Or, when the bit field indicates 1, the UE monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, and stops monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0, that is, switches from SSSG0 to SSSG1.
(2)、经过一段时间自动切换SSSG。(2), automatically switch SSSG after a period of time.
方式1:当UE开始根据SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH,同时会启动定时器。当定时器到期时,则UE会切换到SSSG0,即UE开始根据SSSG0中的SS set监听PDCCH,停止根据SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH。其中,上述定时器的长度可以是基站配置给UE的。Mode 1: When the UE starts to monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, the timer will be started at the same time. When the timer expires, the UE will switch to SSSG0, that is, the UE starts to monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0, and stops monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1. The length of the above timer may be configured by the base station to the UE.
方式2:当UE工作在SSSG1,即根据SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH,经历一段时长(duration),则UE会切换到SSSG0,即UE开始根据SSSG0中的SS set监听PDCCH,停止根据SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH。其中,上述一段时长可以通过基站配置给UE的。Mode 2: When the UE works in SSSG1, that is, monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, after a period of time (duration), the UE will switch to SSSG0, that is, the UE starts to monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0, and stops according to the SS set in SSSG1. The SS set monitors the PDCCH. The above-mentioned period of time may be configured by the base station to the UE.
(3)、UE根据SSSG0中的SS set检测到任意格式的DCI,则UE监听PDCCH的SS set将从SSSG0切换到SSSG1。(3) The UE detects any format of DCI according to the SS set in SSSG0, and the UE monitors the SS set of the PDCCH and switches from SSSG0 to SSSG1.
在上文,以将BWP中的SS set划分为2个组为例描述的,并不作为对本申请的限定。可以将BWP中的SS set划分为除2个外,其它数量的分组。例如,如图10所示,可以将BWP中的SS set划分为3个分组,分别为SSSG0、SSSG1和SSSG2,UE可以在上述3个SSSG间进行切换。在图10中,是以SSSG间进行双向切换为例示意的,比如,SSSG0与SSSG1间的切换,可以由SSSG0切换到SSSG1,或者,由SSSG1切换到SSSG0,并不作为对本申请实施例的限定。本申请实施例的SSSG切换也可以是单向切换的,比如,仅支持由SSSG0切换到SSSG1,或者仅支持由SSSG1切换到SSSG0等。In the above, the SS set in the BWP is divided into two groups as an example for description, which is not intended to limit the present application. The SS set in BWP can be divided into groups other than 2. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, the SS set in the BWP can be divided into three groups, namely SSSG0, SSSG1 and SSSG2, and the UE can switch between the above three SSSGs. In FIG. 10 , bidirectional handover between SSSGs is used as an example. For example, the handover between SSSG0 and SSSG1 can be switched from SSSG0 to SSSG1, or from SSSG1 to SSSG0, which is not a limitation to the embodiments of the present application . The SSSG handover in this embodiment of the present application may also be a one-way handover, for example, only the handover from SSSG0 to SSSG1 is supported, or only the handover from SSSG1 to SSSG0 is supported.
需要说明的是,根据3GPP组织定义的NR版本15(release15,R15)和版本(release16,R16)的协议,如果配置了SSSG,则每个SSSG中至少包含一个SS set。UE可以根据配置的SS set的参数,确定PDCCH监听时机。因此,对于SSSG切换来说,无论UE切换到哪个SSSG,UE都会根据SSSG中的SS set监听PDCCH,区别在于PDCCH监听时机稀疏程度不同。It should be noted that, according to the NR version 15 (release15, R15) and version (release16, R16) protocols defined by the 3GPP organization, if SSSG is configured, each SSSG contains at least one SS set. The UE may determine the PDCCH monitoring timing according to the configured parameters of the SS set. Therefore, for SSSG handover, no matter which SSSG the UE switches to, the UE will monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set in the SSSG, the difference is that the PDCCH monitoring timing is sparse.
5、为了进一步的减少监听PDCCH,节省UE的功耗。目前有两种增强方案,该两种增强方案,都是为了既支持SSSG切换又支持跳过PDCCH监听(PDCCH skipping)。5. In order to further reduce the monitoring of the PDCCH and save the power consumption of the UE. There are currently two enhancement schemes, both of which are for supporting both SSSG handover and PDCCH skipping (PDCCH skipping).
增强方案1:在上述方案4中动态SSSG切换的方案中,将其中一个SSSG设置为没有PDCCH监听时机或者没有候选PDCCH或者没有SS set,以下简称为空SSSG。例如,将图9中的SSSG0设置为空SSSG,或者将图10中的SSSG1设置为空SSSG。当UE切换到空SSSG时,就可以实现UE停止监听PDCCH,直至UE切换到其他的SSSG。Enhanced scheme 1: In the scheme of dynamic SSSG switching in the above scheme 4, one of the SSSGs is set to have no PDCCH monitoring opportunity or no candidate PDCCH or no SS set, hereinafter referred to as an empty SSSG. For example, set SSSG0 in FIG. 9 to an empty SSSG, or set SSSG1 in FIG. 10 to be an empty SSSG. When the UE switches to an empty SSSG, it can be realized that the UE stops monitoring the PDCCH until the UE switches to another SSSG.
如图10所示,以将SS set划分为3个SSSG,且该3个SSSG中的SSSG2为空SSSG,不存在PDCCH监听时机为例,则根据DCI中的指示域在不同SSSG切换的方案可以为:如表2所示,当DCI指示域为00时,UE由SSSG1切换到SSSG0,即UE根据SSSG0中的SS set监听PDCCH,停止根据SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH。当DCI指示域为01时,UE由SSG0切换到SSSG1,即UE根据SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH,停止根据SSSG0中的SS set监听PDCCH。当DCI指示域为10时,UE切换到SSSG2,该SSSG2为空SSSG,不存在PDCCH监听时机,UE不再监听PDCCH,从而节省能耗。应当指示,当DCI指示域为10时,UE可以由SSSG1切换到上述SSSG2,或者,可以由SSSG0切换到上述SSSG2等,不作限定。As shown in Figure 10, taking the SS set divided into 3 SSSGs, and the SSSG2 in the 3 SSSGs is an empty SSSG, and there is no PDCCH monitoring opportunity as an example, the solution of switching between different SSSGs according to the indication field in the DCI can be As shown in Table 2, when the DCI indication field is 00, the UE switches from SSSG1 to SSSG0, that is, the UE monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0, and stops monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1. When the DCI indication field is 01, the UE switches from SSG0 to SSSG1, that is, the UE monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, and stops monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0. When the DCI indication field is 10, the UE switches to SSSG2, which is an empty SSSG, there is no PDCCH monitoring opportunity, and the UE no longer monitors the PDCCH, thereby saving energy consumption. It should be indicated that when the DCI indication field is 10, the UE can switch from SSSG1 to the above SSSG2, or can switch from SSSG0 to the above SSSG2, etc., which is not limited.
表2Table 2
DCI指示域DCI indication field SSSG切换SSSG switch
0000 由SSSG1切换到SSSG0Switch from SSSG1 to SSSG0
0101 由SSSG0切换到SSSG1Switch from SSSG0 to SSSG1
1010 切换到SSSG2,SSSG2为空SSSGSwitch to SSSG2, SSSG2 is empty SSSG
增强方案二:将上述方案4中的动态SSSG切换方案与上述方案3中基于DCI的PDCCH跳过方案相结合。基站可以通过DCI指示域,指示UE执行SSSG切换还是PDCCH跳过。Enhanced scheme 2: Combine the dynamic SSSG switching scheme in scheme 4 above with the DCI-based PDCCH skipping scheme in scheme 3 above. The base station can instruct the UE to perform SSSG handover or PDCCH skipping through the DCI indication field.
在一种设计中,如表3所示,以将BWP中的SS set划分为SSSG0和SSSG1为例,当DCI指示域为00时,UE根据SSSG0中的SS set监听PDCCH,在SSSG1中的SS set不监听PDCCH,即UE由SSSG1切换到SSSG0。或者当DCI指示域为01时,UE根据SSSG1中的SS set监听PDCCH,在SSSG0中的SS set上不监听PDCCH,即UE由SSSG0切换到SSSG1。当DCI指示域为10时,UE在时长1这段时间内停止监听PDCCH,即UE在接收到上述DCI,满足生效延后开始计时,持续时长1不再监听PDCCH。当DCI指示域为10时,UE在时长2这段时间内停止监听PDCCH,即UE在接收到上述DCI,满足生效时延后开始计时,持续时长2不再监听PDCCH。时域单元的单位可以为时隙或符号等,不作限定。In one design, as shown in Table 3, taking the SS set in the BWP divided into SSSG0 and SSSG1 as an example, when the DCI indication field is 00, the UE monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG0, and the SS set in SSSG1 The set does not monitor the PDCCH, that is, the UE switches from SSSG1 to SSSG0. Or when the DCI indication field is 01, the UE monitors the PDCCH according to the SS set in SSSG1, and does not monitor the PDCCH on the SS set in SSSG0, that is, the UE switches from SSSG0 to SSSG1. When the DCI indication field is 10, the UE stops monitoring the PDCCH during the duration of 1, that is, the UE starts timing after receiving the above-mentioned DCI and meets the effective delay, and no longer monitors the PDCCH for the duration of 1. When the DCI indication field is 10, the UE stops monitoring the PDCCH during the duration of 2, that is, the UE starts timing after receiving the above-mentioned DCI and satisfying the effective delay, and no longer monitors the PDCCH for the duration 2. The unit of the time domain unit may be time slot or symbol, etc., which is not limited.
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2022080766-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2022080766-appb-000002
针对上述介绍的节省UE的功耗的方案,上述各个方案可以单独使用,或者相结合使用。申请人通过研究发现,将上述方案2中的基于PDCCH的WUS的方案,与上述方案4中的动态SSSG切换的方案,相结合,可以存在以下问题:For the above-mentioned solutions for saving the power consumption of the UE, the above-mentioned solutions may be used alone or in combination. The applicant has found through research that the following problems may exist when combining the PDCCH-based WUS solution in the above solution 2 with the dynamic SSSG handover solution in the above solution 4:
通过前述介绍可知,WUS携带于格式2-6的DCI中,在SSSG不为空的情况下,每个SSSG中包括至少一个SS set,每个SS set在配置的时候,基站会配置在候选PDCCH位置监听DCI的格式。若在DRX周期的非激活时间时,UE工作的SSSG中不包括监听DCI格式2-6的SS set,或者该SSSG为空,那么UE将不能监听到WUS,UE将根据配置的DRX周期,后续一定启动drx-on Duration Timer,WUS失去了其效果,可能带来UE功耗的浪费。It can be seen from the foregoing introduction that WUS is carried in the DCI of formats 2-6. When the SSSG is not empty, each SSSG includes at least one SS set. When each SS set is configured, the base station will configure it on the candidate PDCCH. The format of the location listening DCI. If in the inactive time of the DRX cycle, the SSSG that the UE works does not include the SS set that monitors DCI formats 2-6, or the SSSG is empty, then the UE will not be able to monitor the WUS, and the UE will follow the configured DRX cycle. Be sure to start drx-on Duration Timer, WUS loses its effect, which may lead to waste of UE power consumption.
例如,在一种场景中,如图11所示,UE在DRX周期的激活时间,工作于SSSG0,该SSSG0中包括用于监听DCI格式2-6的SS set。在DRX周期的激活时间,UE接收到切换命令,由SSSG0切换到SSSG1,该SSSG1中不包括用于监听DCI格式2-6的SS set。后续在DRX周期的非激活时间,UE也一直工作于SSSG1。但由于该SSSG1中不包括用于监听DCI格式2-6的SS set,将导致UE在WUS时间窗内,不能监听WUS。For example, in a scenario, as shown in FIG. 11 , the UE works in SSSG0 at the activation time of the DRX cycle, and the SSSG0 includes the SS set for monitoring DCI formats 2-6. At the activation time of the DRX cycle, the UE receives the handover command and switches from SSSG0 to SSSG1, which does not include the SS set for monitoring DCI formats 2-6. In the subsequent inactive time of the DRX cycle, the UE also works in SSSG1 all the time. However, since the SSSG1 does not include the SS set for monitoring DCI formats 2-6, the UE cannot monitor the WUS within the WUS time window.
在另一种场景中,如图12所示,与上述类似,在DRX周期的激活时间,UE工作在SSSG0,该SSSG0中包括用于监听WUS的SS set。在DRX周期的激活时间,UE切换到SSSG1,不同的是,该SSSG1为空SSSG,即该SSSG中不存在任何PDCCH监听时机。由于UE工作在SSSG1上的时长包含了WUS时间窗,导致UE在WUS时间窗内,也不能监听WUS。In another scenario, as shown in FIG. 12 , similar to the above, at the activation time of the DRX cycle, the UE works in the SSSG0, and the SSSG0 includes the SS set for monitoring the WUS. At the activation time of the DRX cycle, the UE switches to the SSSG1. The difference is that the SSSG1 is an empty SSSG, that is, there is no PDCCH monitoring opportunity in the SSSG. Since the duration of the UE working on the SSSG1 includes the WUS time window, the UE cannot monitor the WUS within the WUS time window.
基于上述,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:在第一DRX周期的激活时间,UE工作于第一SSSG。在第一DRX周期的非激活时间至所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间内的WUS时间窗口之前,UE由第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。可选的,该第二SSSG可包括用于监听WUS的SS set。从而使得,UE在WUS时间窗内,可以监听WUS,使得WUS可以实现其功能,节省UE能耗。关于该通信方法,可具体参见下述实施例一的介绍。Based on the above, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. The method includes: at the activation time of the first DRX cycle, the UE works in the first SSSG. The UE switches from the first SSSG to the second SSSG before the WUS time window from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the inactive time of the first DRX cycle. Optionally, the second SSSG may include an SS set for monitoring the WUS. Therefore, the UE can monitor the WUS within the WUS time window, so that the WUS can realize its function and save the energy consumption of the UE. Regarding the communication method, reference may be made to the introduction of the following Embodiment 1 for details.
实施例一。Example 1.
如图13所示,该实施例一提供一种通信方法的流程图,至少包括:As shown in FIG. 13 , the first embodiment provides a flowchart of a communication method, including at least:
步骤1300:基站向UE发送RRC信令,该RRC信令用于配置以下参数中的至少一项:Step 1300: The base station sends RRC signaling to the UE, where the RRC signaling is used to configure at least one of the following parameters:
1、为服务小区的BWP配置SS set参数,关于配置的SS set参数的内容可参见前述。其中,服务小区中可包括至少一个BWP,基站可以为上述至少一个BWP中的一个或多个BWP配置SS set。基站可以激活上述至少一个BWP中的一个BWP,称为激活BWP。UE和基站可以在激活BWP上进行数据或信令等传输。在本申请实施例中,如无特别说明,BWP可以指下行BWP,UE和基站在下行BWP上,通过PDSCH或PDCCH进行下行传输。1. Configure SS set parameters for the BWP of the serving cell. For the content of the configured SS set parameters, refer to the foregoing. The serving cell may include at least one BWP, and the base station may configure an SS set for one or more BWPs in the at least one BWP. The base station may activate one of the above at least one BWP, which is called an activated BWP. The UE and the base station can transmit data or signaling on the activated BWP. In the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the BWP may refer to the downlink BWP, and the UE and the base station perform downlink transmission on the downlink BWP through the PDSCH or the PDCCH.
2、BWP内的SSSG的配置信息,即BWP内的SS set分别属于哪一个SSSG。可选的,上述配置的SS set的参数中还可以包括:搜索空间组标识列表(search space group ID list),用于表示配置的SS set属于哪一个SSSG。示例的,搜索空间组标识列表中可以包含配置给SS set的SSSG的标识。2. The configuration information of the SSSG in the BWP, that is, which SSSG the SS set in the BWP belongs to. Optionally, the parameters of the SS set configured above may further include: a search space group ID list, which is used to indicate which SSSG the configured SS set belongs to. For example, the search space group identifier list may include the identifier of the SSSG configured to the SS set.
应当指出,针对一个SS set可以被配置为属于一个SSSG,也可以被配置为属于多个SSSG,还可以被配置为不属于任何SSSG等,不作限定。例如,当一个SS set没有被配置参数搜索空间组标识列表时,可表示该SS set不属于任何SSSG。It should be noted that an SS set may be configured to belong to one SSSG, may be configured to belong to multiple SSSGs, and may also be configured to not belong to any SSSG, etc., without limitation. For example, when an SS set is not configured with the parameter search space group identification list, it may indicate that the SS set does not belong to any SSSG.
前述介绍了,通过为服务小区的BWP配置SS set参数,可以为BWP配置至少一个SS set。后续,通过为SS set配置参数搜索空间组标识列表,可将SS set配置给不同的SSSG。举例来说,UE的服务小区中包括4个BWP,可以为BWP配置SS set。上述4个BWP中的一个BWP,例如BWP0被配置4个SS set,通过为上述4个SS set配置搜索空间组标识列表,可以将上述4个SS set划分为不同的SSSG。例如,上述4个SS set中的SS set0至SS set2被配置的搜索空间组标识为0,而SS set3被配置的搜索空间组标识为1,则可以将上述BWP0的SS set划分为2个SSSG,其中,SSSG0中包括SS set0、SS set1和SS set2,而SSSG1中包括SS set3。As described above, by configuring the SS set parameter for the BWP of the serving cell, at least one SS set can be configured for the BWP. Subsequently, the SS set can be configured to different SSSGs by configuring the parameter search space group identification list for the SS set. For example, the serving cell of the UE includes 4 BWPs, and the SS set can be configured for the BWPs. One BWP in the above-mentioned 4 BWPs, for example, BWP0 is configured with 4 SS sets. By configuring the search space group identification list for the above-mentioned 4 SS sets, the above-mentioned 4 SS sets can be divided into different SSSGs. For example, the configured search space group identification of SS set0 to SS set2 in the above four SS sets is 0, and the configured search space group identification of SS set3 is 1, then the SS set of the above BWP0 can be divided into two SSSGs , where SSSG0 includes SS set0, SS set1 and SS set2, and SSSG1 includes SS set3.
同理,关于SSSG可能为空SSSG,或者非空SSSG。若一个SSSG中不存在PDCCH监听时机或候选PDCCH,则称该SSSG为空SSSG,否则称该SSSG为非空SSSG,非空SSSG至少包括一个SS set,并且该SS set的参数定义了候选PDCCH和PDCCH监听时机。关于空SSSG包括但不限以下几种情况:Similarly, the SSSG may be an empty SSSG, or a non-empty SSSG. If there is no PDCCH monitoring opportunity or candidate PDCCH in an SSSG, the SSSG is called an empty SSSG; otherwise, the SSSG is called a non-empty SSSG. The non-empty SSSG includes at least one SS set, and the parameters of the SS set define the candidate PDCCH and PDCCH listening timing. The empty SSSG includes but is not limited to the following situations:
情况1:定义一个SSSG标识(identity document,ID)x,但没有将任何SS set的搜索 空间组标识列表中的SSSG标识配置为该SSSG标识x。即标识为x的SSSG中没有SS set。Case 1: An SSSG identity (identity document, ID) x is defined, but the SSSG identity in the search space group identity list of any SS set is not configured as the SSSG identity x. That is, there is no SS set in the SSSG identified as x.
情况2:定义一个SSSG标识x,同时将一个或多个SS set的搜索空间组标识列表中的SSSG标识配置为该SSSG标识x。但上述一个或多个SS set中不存在PDCCH监听时机,则称该SSSGx为空SSSG。在一种设计中,当某一个SS set的PDCCH监听周期和偏移配置为空(null),监听PDCCH的持续时间配置为0,或者时隙内PDCCH监听图案配置为全0等,则该SS set不存在PDCCH监听时机。Case 2: Define an SSSG identity x, and configure the SSSG identity in the search space group identity list of one or more SS sets as the SSSG identity x. However, if there is no PDCCH monitoring opportunity in the above-mentioned one or more SS sets, the SSSGx is called an empty SSSG. In one design, when the PDCCH monitoring period and offset of a certain SS set are configured as null (null), the duration of monitoring PDCCH is configured as 0, or the PDCCH monitoring pattern in the time slot is configured as all 0s, etc., the SS There is no PDCCH listening opportunity for set.
3、配置用于监听WUS的参数,该参数包括以下至少一项:3. Configure the parameters for monitoring the WUS. The parameters include at least one of the following:
-PS-RNTI,该PS-RNTI用于对承载WUS的DCI进行加扰。- PS-RNTI, the PS-RNTI is used to scramble the DCI carrying WUS.
-DCI格式2-6的SS set,该DCI格式2_6的SS set,即可以用于传输WUS的SS set。上述配置的SS set的参数中可以包括DCI格式。- SS set of DCI format 2-6, the SS set of DCI format 2-6, that is, the SS set that can be used to transmit WUS. The parameters of the SS set configured above may include the DCI format.
-DCI格式2_6的负载大小(payload size)。- the payload size of DCI format 2_6.
-WUS指示比特在格式2_6的DCI中的位置。例如,该WUS指示比特可以为0或1,用于指示UE在后续是否开启drx-onDurationTimer。- WUS indicates the position of the bits in the DCI of format 2_6. For example, the WUS indication bit may be 0 or 1, which is used to indicate whether the UE enables drx-onDurationTimer subsequently.
-WUS时间窗的相关参数。UE根据该WUS时间窗的相关参数,可确定WUS窗口。例如,在一种设计中,基站通过RRC参数可为UE配置时间偏移(ps-Offset)。该时间偏移是指WUS时间窗的开始位置到drx-onDurationTimer开始的位置之间的时间偏移。- Parameters related to the WUS time window. The UE may determine the WUS window according to the relevant parameters of the WUS time window. For example, in one design, the base station may configure a time offset (ps-Offset) for the UE through an RRC parameter. The time offset refers to the time offset between the start position of the WUS time window and the start position of the drx-onDurationTimer.
4、配置DRX相关的参数。关于基站为UE配置的DRX相关的参数,至少可以包括前述表1所示的计时器。4. Configure DRX-related parameters. The DRX-related parameters configured by the base station for the UE may at least include the timers shown in Table 1 above.
该步骤1300是可选的:在执行下述步骤1301和步骤1302之前,并非一定需要执行步骤1300。例如,基站可以通过上述步骤1300中的RRC信令为UE配置半静态的参数;在下一次重配置半静态参数之前,上述参数都有效。而两次RRC配置之间,UE可以利用下述步骤1301和步骤1302进行多次SSSG的切换。This step 1300 is optional: it is not necessary to perform step 1300 before performing the following steps 1301 and 1302 . For example, the base station may configure semi-static parameters for the UE through the RRC signaling in the above step 1300; the above parameters are all valid until the semi-static parameters are reconfigured next time. Between two RRC configurations, the UE may perform multiple SSSG handovers using the following steps 1301 and 1302 .
步骤1301:在第一DRX周期的激活时间,UE工作在第一SSSG。Step 1301: At the activation time of the first DRX cycle, the UE works in the first SSSG.
其中,上述第一SSSG可以为非空SSSG,或者空SSSG。若第一SSSG为非空SSSG,上述UE工作在第一SSSG的过程可包括:UE可以根据上述第一SSSG中的SS set监听PDCCH。而若第一SSSG为空SSSG时,上述UE工作在第一SSSG的过程可包括:由于第一SSSG没有PDCCH监听时机或候选PDCCH,所以UE在第一SSSG的这段时间内,UE不监听PDCCH。由于只有Type3-PDCCH CSS和USS可以进行SSSG分组,因此,上述在第一SSSG(空SSSG)的时间段内UE不监听的PDCCH可以指Type3-PDCCH CSS和USS的PDCCH。The above-mentioned first SSSG may be a non-empty SSSG or an empty SSSG. If the first SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, the process of the UE working in the first SSSG may include: the UE may monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set in the first SSSG. However, if the first SSSG is an empty SSSG, the above-mentioned process of the UE working in the first SSSG may include: since the first SSSG has no PDCCH monitoring opportunity or candidate PDCCH, the UE does not monitor the PDCCH during the period of the first SSSG. . Since only Type3-PDCCH CSS and USS can perform SSSG grouping, the above-mentioned PDCCH that the UE does not monitor during the first SSSG (empty SSSG) period may refer to Type3-PDCCH CSS and PDCCH of USS.
在一种设计中,如图4所示,DRX周期包括激活时间和非激活时间等。其中,在激活时间,UE处于唤醒态,监听PDCCH,在非激活时间,UE处于休眠态,不再监听PDCCH,从而节省UE的功耗。UE在DRX周期的激活时间可以包括以下至少一个定时器正在运行:drx-onDurationTimer,drx-Inactivity Timer,drx-Retransmission TimerDL,或drx-Retransmission TimerUL等。In one design, as shown in Figure 4, the DRX cycle includes active time, inactive time, and the like. Wherein, during the activation time, the UE is in an awake state and monitors the PDCCH, and during the inactive time, the UE is in a dormant state and no longer monitors the PDCCH, thereby saving the power consumption of the UE. The activation time of the UE in the DRX cycle may include at least one of the following timers running: drx-onDurationTimer, drx-Inactivity Timer, drx-Retransmission TimerDL, or drx-Retransmission TimerUL, etc.
在一种设计中,UE和基站间可存在多个BWP,该多个BWP中包括一个激活的BWP,UE和基站可以在激活的BWP上,进行数据或信令传输。通过前述介绍可知,该激活的BWP上可以配置多个SS set,且可以将该多个SS set划分为一个或多个SSSG。在UE的任一个DRX周期(可称为第一DRX周期)的激活时间,UE可以工作在其中一个SSSG, 该UE工作的SSSG称为第一SSSG。In one design, multiple BWPs may exist between the UE and the base station, the multiple BWPs include an activated BWP, and the UE and the base station may transmit data or signaling on the activated BWP. It can be seen from the foregoing introduction that multiple SS sets can be configured on the activated BWP, and the multiple SS sets can be divided into one or more SSSGs. At the activation time of any DRX cycle (which may be referred to as the first DRX cycle) of the UE, the UE may work in one of the SSSGs, and the SSSG that the UE works is referred to as the first SSSG.
关于第一DRX周期可作如下说明:通过前述记载可知,基站可以通过RRC信令为UE配置DRX参数,UE可以根据DRX参数,确定DRX周期的长度。根据上述DRX周期的长度,UE可以确定至少一个DRX周期。每个DRX周期可以括激活时间和非激活时间,关于一个DRX周期的示意,可参见图4所示。其中,第一DRX周期可以为上述至少一个DRX周期中的任一个DRX周期,例如,第一DRX周期可以指图4中的第i个DRX周期,或者指图4中的第i+1个DRX周期,所述i为大于或等于1的任意整数。举例来说,基站通过RRC信令为UE配置的DRX参数中的DRX周期长度为10ms,按照上述RRC信令的配置,UE可以确定每10ms为一个DRX周期,每个DRX周期内可包括激活时间和非激活时间等。上述第一DRX可以为任一个10ms的DRX周期等。可选的,DRX周期的长度可以通过步骤1300重配置。The first DRX cycle can be described as follows: from the foregoing description, the base station can configure DRX parameters for the UE through RRC signaling, and the UE can determine the length of the DRX cycle according to the DRX parameters. According to the length of the above DRX cycle, the UE may determine at least one DRX cycle. Each DRX cycle may include an active time and an inactive time. For an illustration of one DRX cycle, see FIG. 4 . The first DRX cycle may be any one of the above at least one DRX cycle. For example, the first DRX cycle may refer to the i-th DRX cycle in FIG. 4 , or the i+1-th DRX cycle in FIG. 4 . period, the i is any integer greater than or equal to 1. For example, the length of the DRX cycle in the DRX parameters configured by the base station for the UE through RRC signaling is 10ms. According to the configuration of the above RRC signaling, the UE can determine that every 10ms is a DRX cycle, and each DRX cycle can include the activation time. and inactive time, etc. The above-mentioned first DRX may be any DRX cycle of 10 ms or the like. Optionally, the length of the DRX cycle can be reconfigured through step 1300 .
步骤1302:在第一DRX周期的非激活时间,UE由第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。具体的,在第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始到第一DRX周期内用于监听WUS的时间之前,UE由第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。可选的,该第二SSSG中可包括用于监听WUS的SS set,UE可以根据该用于监听WUS的SS set,在WUS时间窗内监听WUS。Step 1302: During the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, the UE switches from the first SSSG to the second SSSG. Specifically, the UE switches from the first SSSG to the second SSSG from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the time for monitoring the WUS in the first DRX cycle. Optionally, the second SSSG may include an SS set for monitoring the WUS, and the UE may monitor the WUS within the WUS time window according to the SS set for monitoring the WUS.
在一种设计中,如图14所示,UE可以确定第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始的时间,以及第一DRX周期的非激活时间内用于监听WUS的时间。UE在上述两个时间之间,UE由第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。In one design, as shown in FIG. 14 , the UE may determine the time when the inactive time of the first DRX cycle starts and the time for monitoring the WUS during the inactive time of the first DRX cycle. Between the above two times, the UE switches from the first SSSG to the second SSSG.
首先介绍,UE确定第一DRX周期的非激活开始的时间:在一种设计中,UE可以在至少一个定时器超时时,认为第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始。上述定时器可包括以下定时器中的至少一项:drx-onDurationTimer、drx-InactivityTimer、drx-Retransmission TimerDL、或者drx-Retransmission TimerUL等。或者,在另一种设计中,考虑到UE可能同时运行多个定时器的场景,UE可以在以上至少一个定时器中最后一个定时器停止运行的时间,认为UE的第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始。举例来说,UE开启drx-onDurationTimer,处于激活时间。后续UE接收到基站用于调度新传的PDCCH,则开启drx-InactivityTimer。如此定义第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始:drx-onDurationTimer和drx-InactivityTimer均超时的时间,可以认为是第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始。例如,在第一时间,drx-onDurationTimer超时,在第二时间,drx-InactivityTimer超时。若第二时间晚于第一时间,则UE认为在第二时间,第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始。First, the UE determines the inactive time of the first DRX cycle: in one design, the UE may consider the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to start when at least one timer expires. The above timer may include at least one of the following timers: drx-onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-Retransmission TimerDL, or drx-Retransmission TimerUL, and the like. Or, in another design, considering the scenario that the UE may run multiple timers at the same time, the UE may consider the first DRX cycle of the UE to be inactive at the time when the last timer in the above at least one timer stops running. Time begins. For example, the UE turns on drx-onDurationTimer and is in the active time. The subsequent UE receives the PDCCH used by the base station to schedule the new transmission, and starts the drx-InactivityTimer. The start of the inactivity time of the first DRX cycle is defined in this way: the time when both drx-onDurationTimer and drx-InactivityTimer time out can be considered as the start of the inactivity time of the first DRX cycle. For example, at the first time, the drx-onDurationTimer times out, and at the second time, the drx-InactivityTimer times out. If the second time is later than the first time, the UE considers that the inactive time of the first DRX cycle starts at the second time.
应当指出,在上文DRX机制的介绍时,可以看出,DRX周期的激活时间,除包括上述定时器运行的场景外,还可以包括其它场景。在上述描述中,是以定时器超时,认为UE进入第一DRX周期的非激活时间为例描述的,并不作为对本申请实施例的限定。可以理解的是,上述第一DRX周期的非激活时间可以是指第一DRX周期的激活时间以外的时间。It should be pointed out that, in the introduction of the DRX mechanism above, it can be seen that the activation time of the DRX cycle may include other scenarios besides the above-mentioned scenario of running the timer. In the above description, the inactive time in which the UE enters the first DRX cycle is considered as an example when the timer times out, which is not a limitation on the embodiments of the present application. It can be understood that, the above-mentioned inactive time of the first DRX cycle may refer to a time other than the active time of the first DRX cycle.
继续介绍,UE确定在第一DRX周期内的非激活时间内用于监听WUS的时间。由于在目前的方案中,UE在WUS时间窗监听WUS。上述UE在第一DRX周期内的非激活时间内监听WUS的时间,可以为WUS时间窗内的任一时间,该任一时间可以为协议预定义或预配置的等。例如,该时间可以是WUS时间窗的开始时间,或WUS时间窗的结束时间等。在图14中,是以该时间为WUS时间窗的开始时间为例进行示意的。Continuing to introduce, the UE determines the time for monitoring the WUS during the inactive time in the first DRX cycle. Because in the current solution, the UE monitors the WUS in the WUS time window. The above-mentioned time that the UE monitors the WUS during the inactive time in the first DRX cycle may be any time in the WUS time window, and the any time may be predefined or pre-configured by a protocol, or the like. For example, the time may be the start time of the WUS time window, or the end time of the WUS time window, or the like. In FIG. 14 , it is illustrated by taking the time as the start time of the WUS time window as an example.
如图14所示,UE可以根据基站为其配置的时间偏移(PS offset)和UE确定的最小时间偏移(minimum offset),确定WUS时间窗。上述时间偏移(PS offset)是指WUS时 间窗的开始位置至drx-onDurationTimer的开始时间的时间间隔,根据该时间偏移,UE可以确定WUS时间窗的开始位置。上述最小时间偏移是指WUS时间窗的结束位置至drx-onDurationTimer的开始时间的时间间隔,根据上述最小时间偏移,UE可以确定WUS时间窗的结束位置;UE确定了WUS时间窗的开始位置,和WUS时间窗的结束位置,从而可以确定整个WUS时间窗的位置。As shown in FIG. 14 , the UE can determine the WUS time window according to the time offset (PS offset) configured for it by the base station and the minimum time offset (minimum offset) determined by the UE. The above-mentioned time offset (PS offset) refers to the time interval from the start position of the WUS time window to the start time of drx-onDurationTimer. According to the time offset, the UE can determine the start position of the WUS time window. The above-mentioned minimum time offset refers to the time interval from the end position of the WUS time window to the start time of drx-onDurationTimer. According to the above-mentioned minimum time offset, the UE can determine the end position of the WUS time window; the UE determines the start position of the WUS time window. , and the end position of the WUS time window, so that the position of the entire WUS time window can be determined.
之后,UE可以在上述第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始到第一DRX周期的非激活时间内用于监听WUS的时间之前的任一个时刻,由第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。UE如何切换到第二SSSG,作如下说明:第二SSSG可以为协议定义的,或者基站为UE配置的。例如,在一种设计中,可以通过协议定义,或者基站为UE配置等方式,定义一个默认的SSSG。在第一DRX周期的非激活时间的开始时刻,UE即回退到该默认的SSSG,该默认的SSSG即为上述第二SSSG。在另一种设计中,UE可以接收来自基站的配置信息,该配置信息用于配置至少一个SSSG;UE可以确定第二SSSG,所确定的第二SSSG属于上述至少一个SSSG。在一种场景中,上述至少一个SSSG可以为在当前激活BWP上基站为UE配置的全部SSSG。UE可以在配置的全部SSSG中确定一个SSSG,即为第二SSSG,该第二SSSG中应该是与第一SSSG不同的。或者,UE可以在配置的全部SSSG中,排除掉第一SSSG,剩余的SSSG形成候选SSSG,UE在候选SSSG中选择一个SSSG,即为第二SSSG。或者,上述至少一个SSSG为基站为UE配置的候选SSSG,该候选SSSG中包括至少一个SSSG;UE可以在候选SSSG中选择一个SSSG,该选择的SSSG即为第二SSSG等。不作限定。该设计与上述第一种设计的最大区别在于,在该设计中第二SSSG并非默认的SSSG,而是UE需要自己查询或确定的。可选的,UE需要自己查询或确定的第二SSSG可以为包括用于监听WUS的SS set的SSSG。在又一种设计中,可以定义一个特殊的SSSG作为第二SSSG,该SSSG中包括仅用于监听WUS的SS set。在第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始,UE切换到该SSSG,并且可以根据该SSSG中的用于监听WUS的SS set,监听PDCCH。After that, the UE may switch from the first SSSG to the second SSSG at any time from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the time before the time for monitoring the WUS during the inactive time of the first DRX cycle. How the UE switches to the second SSSG is described as follows: the second SSSG may be defined by the protocol or configured by the base station for the UE. For example, in one design, a default SSSG may be defined by means of protocol definition, or the base station configures for the UE. At the beginning of the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, the UE falls back to the default SSSG, which is the second SSSG. In another design, the UE may receive configuration information from the base station, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG; the UE may determine a second SSSG, and the determined second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG. In one scenario, the at least one SSSG may be all SSSGs configured by the base station for the UE on the currently activated BWP. The UE may determine one SSSG among all the configured SSSGs, that is, the second SSSG, and the second SSSG should be different from the first SSSG. Alternatively, the UE may exclude the first SSSG from all the configured SSSGs, and the remaining SSSGs form a candidate SSSG, and the UE selects one SSSG among the candidate SSSGs, which is the second SSSG. Alternatively, the above at least one SSSG is a candidate SSSG configured by the base station for the UE, and the candidate SSSG includes at least one SSSG; the UE may select one SSSG from the candidate SSSG, and the selected SSSG is the second SSSG and the like. Not limited. The biggest difference between this design and the above-mentioned first design is that in this design, the second SSSG is not the default SSSG, but needs to be queried or determined by the UE itself. Optionally, the second SSSG that the UE needs to query or determine by itself may be an SSSG that includes an SS set for monitoring the WUS. In yet another design, a special SSSG may be defined as the second SSSG, and the SSSG includes an SS set only for monitoring the WUS. Starting from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, the UE switches to the SSSG, and can monitor the PDCCH according to the SS set used to monitor the WUS in the SSSG.
在一种可能的实现方式中,为了简化设计,UE可以在第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始时,或者称为在第一DRX周期的激活时间结束时,直接由第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。上述第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始,或者第一DRX周期的激活时间结束,可以认为是drx-onDurationTimer超时,或者drx-InactivityTimer超时,或者,drx-Retransmission TimerDL超时,或者drx-Retransmission TimerUL超时等。In a possible implementation manner, in order to simplify the design, the UE may directly switch from the first SSSG to the second SSSG at the beginning of the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, or when the activation time of the first DRX cycle ends. SSSG. When the inactive time of the first DRX cycle starts, or the activation time of the first DRX cycle ends, it can be considered as drx-onDurationTimer timeout, or drx-InactivityTimer timeout, or drx-Retransmission TimerDL timeout, or drx-Retransmission TimerUL timeout, etc. .
采用上述实施例一的方案,在WUS时间窗之前,UE可以切换到第二SSSG,而第二SSSG包括用于监听WUS的SS set,从而使得UE可以根据该SS set,监听WUS,进而使得UE可以根据WUS,决定是否开启drx-onDurationTimer,WUS实现了其功能,节省UE功耗。With the solution of the above-mentioned first embodiment, before the WUS time window, the UE can switch to the second SSSG, and the second SSSG includes the SS set for monitoring the WUS, so that the UE can monitor the WUS according to the SS set, thereby enabling the UE to monitor the WUS. It can be determined whether to enable drx-onDurationTimer according to WUS. WUS realizes its function and saves UE power consumption.
需要说明的是,在上述描述中,是以上述方案应用于UE侧进行说明的。上述方案也可以应用于基站侧。如果上述方案应用于基站侧,当基站按照上述方法,在第一DRX周期的激活时间,确定UE工作于第一SSSG时,若第一SSSG为非空时,则基站可以按照第一SSSG包括的SS set的配置,向UE发送PDCCH。在第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始至第一DRX周期的非激活时间内用于监听WUS的时间之前,基站确定UE由第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG,则基站可以按照第二SSSG包括的SS set的配置,发送PDCCH等。It should be noted that, in the above description, the above solution is applied to the UE side for description. The above solution can also be applied to the base station side. If the above solution is applied to the base station side, when the base station determines that the UE is working in the first SSSG at the activation time of the first DRX cycle according to the above method, and if the first SSSG is not empty, the base station can follow the The configuration of the SS set sends the PDCCH to the UE. From the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the time for monitoring the WUS within the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, if the base station determines that the UE is handed over from the first SSSG to the second SSSG, the base station may follow the Configuration of SS set, sending PDCCH, etc.
可选的,与上述相似的,上述第二SSSG中包括用于监听WUS的SS set,在所述第一 DRX的非激活时间,基站可以按照上述用于监听WUS的SS set,发送所述WUS等。进一步,上述第二SSSG中可以是协议定义的,或者,基站确定的等。上述第二SSSG中可以包括仅用于监听WUS的搜索空间集,不再包括其它类型的SS set。或者,基站可以向UE发送配置信息,该配置信息用于配置至少一个SSSG,上述至少一个SSSG中包括上述第二SSSG等。Optionally, similar to the above, the above-mentioned second SSSG includes an SS set for monitoring the WUS. During the inactive time of the first DRX, the base station can send the WUS according to the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring the WUS. Wait. Further, the above-mentioned second SSSG may be defined by a protocol, or determined by the base station, or the like. The above-mentioned second SSSG may include a search space set only for monitoring WUS, and no longer include other types of SS sets. Alternatively, the base station may send configuration information to the UE, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG, and the at least one SSSG includes the second SSSG and the like.
实施例二。Example two.
该实施例二提供一种通信方法,与上述实施例一不同的是,在第一DRX周期的非激活时间,无论UE被留在任何SSSG,UE均根据用于监听WUS的SS set,监听WUS,而不进行SSSG的切换。而上述用于监听WUS的SS set,可以为其配置SSSG,或者,不再为其配置SSSG等,不作限定。例如,在一种设计中,基站可以向UE发送上述用于监听WUS的SS set的配置信息,该SS set的配置信息包括用于确定SSSG的配置信息,或者,不包括用于确定SSSG的配置信息等,不作限定。The second embodiment provides a communication method, which is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that, during the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, regardless of whether the UE is left in any SSSG, the UE monitors the WUS according to the SS set used to monitor the WUS. , without SSSG handover. The above-mentioned SS set used to monitor the WUS can be configured with SSSG, or it can no longer be configured with SSSG, which is not limited. For example, in one design, the base station may send the above-mentioned configuration information of the SS set used to monitor the WUS to the UE, where the configuration information of the SS set includes the configuration information used to determine the SSSG, or does not include the configuration information used to determine the SSSG Information, etc., are not limited.
如图15所示,该实施例二提供一种通信方法的流程,该流程至少包括:As shown in FIG. 15 , the second embodiment provides a flow of a communication method, and the flow includes at least:
步骤1500:基站通过RRC信令为UE配置至少一项参数。关于该步骤1500可具体参见上述步骤1300的介绍。Step 1500: The base station configures at least one parameter for the UE through RRC signaling. For details about this step 1500, please refer to the description of the above-mentioned step 1300.
与上述步骤1300不同的是,在步骤1500中:针对用于监听WUS的SS set的配置信息,该配置信息中可包括用于确定SSSG的配置信息,或者,不包括用于确定SSSG的配置信息。若该配置信息中包括用于确定SSSG的配置信息,则代表为所述监听WUS的SS set属于对应的SSSG,否则所述监听WUS的SS set不属于任何SSSG。Different from the above step 1300, in step 1500: for the configuration information used to monitor the SS set of the WUS, the configuration information may include the configuration information used to determine the SSSG, or not include the configuration information used to determine the SSSG . If the configuration information includes configuration information for determining the SSSG, it means that the SS set monitoring the WUS belongs to the corresponding SSSG, otherwise the SS set monitoring the WUS does not belong to any SSSG.
在一种设计中,上述用于监听WUS的SS set的配置信息中可包括用于指示SSSG标识的指示信息,例如,包括搜索空间组标识列表等。或者,该配置信息中的其它信息,可以间接指示SSSG,例如,该配置信息中的PDCCH监听周期、偏移或PDCCH监听图案等中的至少一项,可间接指示该SS set所归属的SSSG等。该步骤1500是可选的。In a design, the above-mentioned configuration information for monitoring the SS set of the WUS may include indication information for indicating the SSSG identity, for example, including a search space group identity list and the like. Alternatively, other information in the configuration information may indirectly indicate the SSSG, for example, at least one of the PDCCH monitoring period, offset or PDCCH monitoring pattern in the configuration information may indirectly indicate the SSSG to which the SS set belongs, etc. . This step 1500 is optional.
步骤1501:在第一DRX周期的非激活时间内,UE工作于任一SSSG,UE根据所述用于监听WUS的SS set,监听WUS。Step 1501: During the inactive time of the first DRX cycle, the UE works in any SSSG, and the UE monitors the WUS according to the SS set for monitoring the WUS.
在一种设计中,UE可以确定WUS时间窗,可以理解的是,该WUS时间窗是位于第一DRX周期的非激活时间内。UE在上述WUS时间窗内,无论UE工作于任何SSSG,UE都根据用于监听WUS的SS set,监听WUS。具体的可以分以下几种情况论述:In one design, the UE may determine the WUS time window, and it can be understood that the WUS time window is within the inactive time of the first DRX cycle. In the above-mentioned WUS time window, the UE monitors the WUS according to the SS set used to monitor the WUS, regardless of whether the UE works in any SSSG. Specifically, the following situations can be discussed:
第一种,上述用于监听WUS的SS set,预先未被配置其所属的SSSG,那么,UE在WUS时间窗内,无论处于任何一个SSSG,都可以根据用于监听WUS的SS set监听WUS。例如,存在两个SSSG,而上述用于监听WUS的SS set不属于上述两个SSSG中的任何SSSG,则在WUS时间窗内,无论UE工作于上述两个SSSG中的任何SSSG,都可以根据上述用于监听WUS的SS set,监听WUS。First, the above-mentioned SS set used to monitor WUS is not pre-configured with the SSSG to which it belongs. Then, the UE can monitor WUS according to the SS set used to monitor WUS in any SSSG within the WUS time window. For example, if there are two SSSGs, and the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring the WUS does not belong to any of the above-mentioned two SSSGs, then within the WUS time window, no matter if the UE works in any of the above-mentioned two SSSGs, it can The above SS set used to monitor WUS, monitor WUS.
第二种,上述用于监听WUS的SS set预先被配置所有SSSG的标识,即每一个SSSG都包括用于监听WUS的SS set,那么,UE在WUS时间窗内,无论处于任何一个SSSG,都可以根据用于监听WUS的SS set监听WUS。例如,存在两个SSSG,而上述用于监听WUS的SS set属于上述两个SSSG中的每一个SSSG,则在WUS时间窗内,无论UE工作于上述两个SSSG中的任何SSSG,都可以根据上述用于监听WUS的SS set,监听WUS。Second, the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS is pre-configured with the identifiers of all SSSGs, that is, each SSSG includes the SS set used for monitoring WUS, then, the UE is in the WUS time window, no matter in any SSSG, WUS can be monitored according to the SS set used to monitor WUS. For example, if there are two SSSGs, and the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring the WUS belongs to each of the above-mentioned two SSSGs, within the WUS time window, no matter the UE works in any SSSG in the above-mentioned two SSSGs, it can be determined according to the The above SS set used to monitor WUS, monitor WUS.
第三种,上述用于监听WUS的SS set,预先被配置部分SSSG的标识,但是在WUS 时间窗内,上述SS set的监听不受SSSG的影响,即在WUS时间窗内,UE无论处于任何SSSG,UE都可以根据上述SS set,监听WUS。例如,有两个SSSG,上述用于监听WUS的SS set属于SSSG0。在WUS时间窗内,即使UE处于SSSG1,UE仍然可以根据SSSG0中的用于监听WUS的SS set,监听WUS,但UE不会停止SSSG1。Third, the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS is pre-configured with some SSSG identifiers, but in the WUS time window, the monitoring of the above SS set is not affected by the SSSG, that is, in the WUS time window, the UE is in any Both the SSSG and the UE can monitor the WUS according to the above SS set. For example, there are two SSSGs, the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS belongs to SSSG0. In the WUS time window, even if the UE is in SSSG1, the UE can still monitor the WUS according to the SS set in SSSG0 for monitoring the WUS, but the UE will not stop SSSG1.
需要说明的是,由于WUS携带于格式2-6的DCI中,因此,上述用于监听WUS的SS set还可以称为DCI格式2_6的SS set。该DCI格式2_6的SS set除了用于监听上述格式2_6的DCI外,还可用于监听其它格式的DCI等,不作限定。也即,上述用于监听WUS的SS set除了用于DCI承载WUS功能外,还可以用于承载其它功能,不作限定。It should be noted that since the WUS is carried in the DCI of format 2-6, the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS can also be referred to as the SS set of DCI format 2-6. The SS set of the DCI format 2_6 can also be used to monitor the DCI of other formats, etc., in addition to being used for monitoring the DCI of the above-mentioned format 2_6, which is not limited. That is, the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS can also be used for carrying other functions in addition to the DCI bearing WUS function, which is not limited.
进一步,需要说明的是,上述方法是以在第一DRX周期的非激活时间内,UE监听WUS,不受SSSG的影响。在第一DRX周期的激活时间内,UE是否监听该DCI格式2_6的SS set,取决于UE当前所处的SSSG。例如,有两个SSSG,上述用于监听WUS的SS set属于SSSG0。用于监听WUS的SS set还用于监听其他DCI format,在第一DRX周期的激活时间内,如果UE切换在SSSG1,则不监听该SS set,如果UE切换在SSSG0,则UE监听该SS set。Further, it should be noted that, in the above method, the UE monitors the WUS during the inactive time of the first DRX cycle and is not affected by the SSSG. During the activation time of the first DRX cycle, whether the UE monitors the SS set of the DCI format 2_6 depends on the SSSG where the UE is currently located. For example, there are two SSSGs, the above-mentioned SS set for monitoring WUS belongs to SSSG0. The SS set used to monitor WUS is also used to monitor other DCI formats. During the activation time of the first DRX cycle, if the UE switches to SSSG1, it does not monitor the SS set. If the UE switches to SSSG0, the UE monitors the SS set. .
采用上述实施例二的方案,通过规定用于监听WUS的SS set的配置信息,或者规定UE监听PDCCH的行为,在WUS时间窗内,无论UE工作于任何SSSG,都可根据上述SS set,监听WUS。从而使得UE在非激活时间内,可以监听到WUS,节省UE的功耗。Using the solution of the second embodiment above, by specifying the configuration information of the SS set used to monitor the WUS, or by specifying the behavior of the UE to monitor the PDCCH, within the WUS time window, no matter the UE works in any SSSG, it can monitor the SS set according to the above-mentioned SS set. WUS. Therefore, the UE can monitor the WUS during the inactive time, saving the power consumption of the UE.
针对上述介绍的节省UE功耗的方案,在上述方案5)中的增强方案一中,UE无论切换到哪个SSSG,确定生效时延的规则是相同的。所述生效时延指UE切换到SSSG所需要的时间。在一种设计中,所述生效时延可以指UE从接收到SSSG切换命令,到切换到该SSSG的时间间隔。例如,如图16所示,UE工作于SSSG0,接收到DCI,指示UE切换到SSSG1,则生效时延Y的开始时间可以为DCI所在的最后一个符号的结束位置,或者DCI所在时隙结束的位置,或者DCI所在符号的开始位置,或者DCI所在时隙的开始位置等,生效时延Y为一个时间长度,从生效时延Y的开始时间,经过生效时延Y对应的时间长度以后,UE切换到SSSG1。Regarding the above-mentioned solution for saving UE power consumption, in the enhanced solution 1 in the above-mentioned solution 5), no matter which SSSG the UE switches to, the rules for determining the effective delay are the same. The effective delay refers to the time required for the UE to switch to the SSSG. In one design, the effective delay may refer to the time interval from when the UE receives the SSSG handover command to the time when the UE is handed over to the SSSG. For example, as shown in Figure 16, the UE works in SSSG0, receives DCI and instructs the UE to switch to SSSG1, then the start time of the effective delay Y can be the end position of the last symbol where the DCI is located, or the end of the time slot where the DCI is located. position, or the start position of the symbol where the DCI is located, or the start position of the time slot where the DCI is located, etc., the effective delay Y is a time length, from the start time of the effective delay Y, after the time length corresponding to the effective delay Y, the UE Switch to SSSG1.
申请人通过研究发现,UE切换到不同的类型的SSSG,生效时延Y的规则应该不同。例如,对于切换到空的SSSG,则生效时延Y的取值应该尽量小。这是因为在实际中,基站预测当前一小段时间不会有数据调度时,才会向UE发送切换命令,使得UE切换到空SSSG。如果生效时延Y的取值较大,可能都大于上述一小段时间的取值,UE再切换到上述空SSSG显然是不合理的,同时,UE尽早的切换到空SSSG,不再监听PDCCH,也可以节省UE的功耗。而对于切换到非空的SSSG,则需要考虑漏检DCI的影响。举例来说,当前基站和UE都工作在SSSG0,基站向UE发送切换SSSG的信令。而UE漏检了该信令,后续基站切换到SSSG1,而UE保留在SSSG0,可能会导致基站和UE的PDCCH监听时机不一样,UE在较长一段时间内监听不到PDCCH。The applicant finds through research that when the UE switches to different types of SSSGs, the rules for the effective delay Y should be different. For example, for switching to an empty SSSG, the value of the effective delay Y should be as small as possible. This is because in practice, the base station only sends a handover command to the UE when it predicts that there will be no data scheduling for a short period of time, so that the UE is handed over to an empty SSSG. If the value of the effective delay Y is large, it may be greater than the value of the above-mentioned short period of time, and it is obviously unreasonable for the UE to switch to the above-mentioned empty SSSG. The power consumption of the UE can also be saved. For switching to a non-empty SSSG, the impact of missing DCI needs to be considered. For example, both the current base station and the UE work in SSSG0, and the base station sends a signaling of switching SSSG to the UE. If the UE misses the detection of this signaling, the subsequent base station switches to SSSG1, while the UE remains in SSSG0, which may lead to different PDCCH monitoring timings of the base station and the UE, and the UE cannot monitor the PDCCH for a long period of time.
通过上述可以看出,针对空SSSG和非空SSSG,UE对切换时延的考虑并不相同。UE如何根据待切换到的SSSG的类型不同,确定对应的切换时延,是本申请实施例需要解决的问题。具体的,可参见下述实施例三的记载。It can be seen from the above that for the empty SSSG and the non-empty SSSG, the UE considers the handover delay differently. How the UE determines the corresponding handover delay according to the type of the SSSG to be handed over is a problem to be solved in the embodiment of the present application. For details, refer to the description of the following Embodiment 3.
实施例三。Example three.
如图17所示,本申请实施三提供一种通信方法的流程,至少包括:As shown in FIG. 17 , the third embodiment of the present application provides a process of a communication method, which at least includes:
步骤1700:基站向UE发送RRC信令,该RRC信令用于配置以下至少一项参数:Step 1700: The base station sends RRC signaling to the UE, where the RRC signaling is used to configure at least one of the following parameters:
1)为服务小区的BWP配置SS set的参数。1) Configure the parameters of the SS set for the BWP of the serving cell.
2)BWP内SSSG的配置信息,即上述SS set分别属于哪一个SSSG等。2) The configuration information of the SSSG in the BWP, that is, which SSSG the above-mentioned SS set belongs to, and so on.
步骤1700是可选的:在步骤1701和步骤1702之前,并非一定需要执行步骤1700。比如,在建立RRC连接态以后基站通过RRC信令配置上述参数;后续,UE直接利用配置的参数,进行SSSG切换。后续在基站重配置上述相关参数之前,上述参数都是有效的。在两次RRC信令配置之间,UE可以利用步骤1701和步骤1702,进行多次SSSG切换。Step 1700 is optional: it is not necessary to perform step 1700 before steps 1701 and 1702 . For example, after the RRC connected state is established, the base station configures the above parameters through RRC signaling; subsequently, the UE directly uses the configured parameters to perform SSSG handover. Subsequently, before the base station reconfigures the above-mentioned relevant parameters, the above-mentioned parameters are all valid. Between two RRC signaling configurations, the UE may use steps 1701 and 1702 to perform multiple SSSG handovers.
步骤1701:UE确定待切换到的SSSG。Step 1701: The UE determines the SSSG to be handed over.
在一种设计中,在满足第一条件时,UE确定待切换到的SSSG,所述生效时延可以指UE满足第一条件的时间与UE切换到所述SSSG的时间间隔。示例的,上述第一条件可以包括:UE接收到基站发送的DCI,该DCI用于指示UE切换SSSG。或者,UE根据切换前的SSSG中的SS set监听PDCCH的时长达到第一时长。或者,UE根据切换前的SSSG监听到DCI,该DCI可以为任意格式的DCI,或者为协议预定义的DCI format,例如DCI format 0_0、0_1、1_0、1_1、0_2、1_2等中的至少一种。In one design, when the first condition is met, the UE determines the SSSG to be switched to, and the effective delay may refer to the time interval between the time when the UE meets the first condition and the time interval between the time when the UE switches to the SSSG. Exemplarily, the above-mentioned first condition may include: the UE receives a DCI sent by the base station, where the DCI is used to instruct the UE to switch the SSSG. Or, the duration of the UE monitoring the PDCCH according to the SS set in the SSSG before the handover reaches the first duration. Or, the UE monitors the DCI according to the SSSG before the handover, and the DCI can be a DCI of any format, or a DCI format predefined by a protocol, such as at least one of the DCI formats 0_0, 0_1, 1_0, 1_1, 0_2, 1_2, etc. .
以第一条件为UE接收到基站发送的DCI为例,生效时延可以指从UE接收到所述DCI的时间到UE切换到所述SSSG的时间间隔。所述UE接收到所述DCI的时间可以是指DCI所在的最后一个符号的结束位置,或者DCI所在时隙结束的位置,或者DCI所在符号的开始位置,或者DCI所在时隙的开始位置等。Taking the first condition that the UE receives the DCI sent by the base station as an example, the effective delay may refer to the time interval from the time when the UE receives the DCI to the time when the UE switches to the SSSG. The time when the UE receives the DCI may refer to the end position of the last symbol where the DCI is located, or the end position of the time slot where the DCI is located, or the start position of the symbol where the DCI is located, or the start position of the time slot where the DCI is located.
步骤1702:UE根据待切换到的SSSG的类型,确定生效时延,所述SSSG的类型包括空SSSG或非空SSSG,所述空SSSG是指SSSG中不存在PDDCH监听时机或候选PDCCH。实现空SSSG的方式可以参考前面的实施例,本发明不限制。Step 1702: The UE determines the effective delay according to the type of the SSSG to be switched to. The type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG. The empty SSSG means that there is no PDDCH monitoring opportunity or candidate PDCCH in the SSSG. For the manner of implementing the empty SSSG, reference may be made to the foregoing embodiments, which are not limited in the present invention.
在一种设计中,若所述SSSG的类型为空SSSG,UE可以根据以下示例中的任一种,确定生效时延:In one design, if the type of the SSSG is an empty SSSG, the UE may determine the effective delay according to any of the following examples:
示例1,UE可以根据第一子载波间隔与时间参数的对应关系,确定所述生效时延,所述时间参数用于确定所述生效时延;可选的,上述第一子载波间隔可以为UE在满足第一条件时,激活BWP的子载波间隔。Example 1, the UE may determine the effective delay according to the corresponding relationship between the first subcarrier interval and a time parameter, and the time parameter is used to determine the effective delay; optionally, the above-mentioned first subcarrier interval may be When the first condition is satisfied, the UE activates the subcarrier spacing of the BWP.
例如,如表4所示,可预先定义或配置子载波间隔的参数μ与时间参数Zμ的对应关系。在UE满足上述第一条件时,UE可以确定当前激活BWP的第一子载波间隔;之后,UE在上述表4所示的对应关系中,查找第一子载波间隔对应的时间参数Zμ,该时间参数Zμ的取值即为生效时延。For example, as shown in Table 4, the corresponding relationship between the parameter μ of the subcarrier spacing and the time parameter Zμ can be predefined or configured. When the UE satisfies the above-mentioned first condition, the UE may determine the first sub-carrier interval of the currently activated BWP; after that, the UE searches for the time parameter Zμ corresponding to the first sub-carrier interval in the correspondence shown in the above Table 4, the time The value of parameter Zμ is the effective delay.
表4Table 4
μμ Zμ(时隙)Zμ(time slot)
00 11
11 11
22 22
33 22
应当指出,在上述描述中是以生效时延的取值等于该时间参数Zμ为例进行说明的。考虑到在生效时延的这段时间内,UE的激活BWP可能会发生切换,那么相应的子载波间隔也可能发生变化。由于上述生效时延通常是以时隙或符号等为单位的。当UE的子载波 间隔发生变化时,虽然上述生效时延的绝对时长(例如,以毫秒为单位的时长等)不会发生变化,但是由于不同子载波间隔内,每个时隙或符号对应的时长并不相同。因此,可以需要进行不同子载波间隔的生效时延的转换。在上述情况下,UE可以根据第一子载波间隔对应的时间参数Zμ,确定所述生效时延。例如,UE在满足第一条件时激活BWP的子载波间隔为子载波间隔对应的μ为μ1,以在SSSG切换过程中新激活BWP的子载波间隔对应的μ为μ2,若子载波间隔μ1与子载波间隔μ2不同,则所述生效时延Y为
Figure PCTCN2022080766-appb-000003
It should be noted that, in the above description, it is taken as an example that the value of the effective delay is equal to the time parameter Zμ. Considering that the activated BWP of the UE may be switched during the effective delay period, the corresponding subcarrier interval may also change. Because the above-mentioned effective delay is usually in units of time slots or symbols. When the subcarrier interval of the UE changes, although the absolute duration of the above-mentioned effective delay (for example, the duration in milliseconds, etc.) will not change, due to the different subcarrier intervals, the corresponding time slot or symbol The duration is not the same. Therefore, it may be necessary to convert the effective delays of different subcarrier intervals. In the above case, the UE may determine the effective delay according to the time parameter Zμ corresponding to the first subcarrier interval. For example, when the UE satisfies the first condition, the subcarrier spacing for activating BWP is μ1 corresponding to the subcarrier spacing, and μ2 corresponding to the subcarrier spacing for newly activated BWP during the SSSG handover process. If the subcarrier spacing μ1 is the same as the subcarrier spacing If the carrier interval μ2 is different, the effective delay Y is
Figure PCTCN2022080766-appb-000003
或者,如果UE被配置了一个或多个用于调度PDSCH的最小时间偏移值K 0min,则UE可以根据上述第一子载波间隔对应的时间参数Zμ与K 0min,共同确定生效时延,其中K 0min的值为上述一个或多个K 0min中当前激活BWP生效的K 0min。例如,该生效时延的取值可以是上述两个取值中的较大值,即生效时延Y=max(K 0min,Zμ)等。再例如,生效时延Y为
Figure PCTCN2022080766-appb-000004
其中K 0min为被调度的服务小区(或者DCI指示的服务小区)的激活BWP生效的K 0min,μ PDSCH为被调度的服务小区(或者DCI指示的服务小区)的激活BWP的子载波间隔的参数,μ PDCCH为调度的服务小区(或者DCI所在的服务小区)的激活BWP的子载波间隔的参数,Zμ为调度的服务小区的(或者DCI所在的服务小区)的激活BWP的子载波间隔对应的时间参数。关于K0作如下说明:K0为PDCCH与被调度的PDSCH之间的时隙偏移。K0=0表示PDCCH与被调度的PDSCH在同一个时隙。K0﹥0表示PDCCH与被调度的PDSCH不在同一个时隙。上述K 0min为PDCCH调度PDSCH时PDSCH的最小可用的时隙偏移,即PDCCH与被调度的PDSCH之间的时隙偏移值K0应大于或等于K 0min。K 0min可以为预义的,或基站为UE配置或指示的等,可以参考目前的技术,不作限定。
Alternatively, if the UE is configured with one or more minimum time offset values K 0min for scheduling PDSCH, the UE may jointly determine the effective delay according to the time parameters Zμ and K 0min corresponding to the first subcarrier interval, where The value of K 0min is the K 0min at which the currently activated BWP takes effect in the above one or more K 0mins . For example, the value of the effective delay may be the larger value of the above two values, that is, the effective delay Y=max(K 0min , Zμ) and the like. For another example, the effective delay Y is
Figure PCTCN2022080766-appb-000004
where K 0min is K 0min at which the activated BWP of the scheduled serving cell (or the serving cell indicated by the DCI) takes effect, and μ PDSCH is the parameter of the subcarrier interval of the activated BWP of the scheduled serving cell (or the serving cell indicated by the DCI) , μ PDCCH is the parameter of the sub-carrier interval of the activated BWP of the scheduled serving cell (or the serving cell where the DCI is located), Z μ is the sub-carrier interval of the activated BWP of the scheduled serving cell (or the serving cell where the DCI is located) corresponds to time parameter. The following description is made about K0: K0 is the time slot offset between the PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH. K0=0 indicates that the PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH are in the same time slot. K0>0 indicates that the PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH are not in the same time slot. The above K 0min is the minimum available time slot offset of the PDSCH when the PDSCH is scheduled by the PDCCH, that is, the time slot offset value K0 between the PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH should be greater than or equal to K 0min . K 0min may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the base station for the UE, etc., and may refer to the current technology without limitation.
同理,上述描述是以生效时延的取值等于时间参数Zμ与K 0min中的较大值为例进行说明的。但是若在生效时延的这段时间内,子载波间隔发生变化,生效时延可以根据子载波间隔进行转换。如果转换后的生效时延不是整数倍的时隙,可以对转换后的生效时延进行向上或向下取整。 In the same way, the above description is given by taking an example that the value of the effective delay is equal to the larger value of the time parameter Zμ and K 0min . However, if the subcarrier spacing changes during the effective delay period, the effective delay can be converted according to the subcarrier spacing. If the converted effective delay is not an integer multiple of time slots, the converted effective delay can be rounded up or down.
示例2,上述生效时延可以为协议预定义的,或者基站为UE配置的值等。例如,基站可以通过RRC信令,为UE配置生效时延,该生效时延的单位可以为符号、时隙或毫秒等,不作限定。在一种设计中,UE最后利用的生效时延的单位需为时隙,如果基站配置的生效时延的单位为符号或者毫秒时,该生效时延可以换算为至少一个时隙,如果换算后的生效时延不是整数倍的时隙,可以对换算后的时隙数进行向上或向下取整。可选的,在上述基站为UE配置生效时延之前,UE可以向基站上报生效时延的最小值。而基站为UE配置的生效时延的取值,应该大于上述生效时延的最小值。示例的,UE可以通过UE能力的信令上报上述生效时延的最小值,UE生效时延的最小值可能与UE的能力和子载波间隔μ相关。例如,子载波间隔μ与UE能力,和生效时延的对应关系,可参见表5所示。Example 2, the above-mentioned effective delay may be predefined by the protocol, or a value configured by the base station for the UE, or the like. For example, the base station may configure an effective delay for the UE through RRC signaling, and the unit of the effective delay may be a symbol, a time slot, or a millisecond, which is not limited. In one design, the last unit of the effective delay used by the UE needs to be a time slot. If the unit of the effective delay configured by the base station is symbols or milliseconds, the effective delay can be converted into at least one time slot. The effective time delay of is not an integer multiple of the time slot, and the converted time slot number can be rounded up or down. Optionally, before the above-mentioned base station configures the effective delay for the UE, the UE may report the minimum value of the effective delay to the base station. The value of the effective delay configured by the base station for the UE should be greater than the above-mentioned minimum value of the effective delay. For example, the UE may report the minimum value of the above-mentioned effective delay through UE capability signaling, and the minimum value of the UE effective delay may be related to the UE's capability and the subcarrier interval μ. For example, the corresponding relationship between the subcarrier interval μ and the UE capability and the effective delay can be referred to as shown in Table 5.
表5table 5
Figure PCTCN2022080766-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2022080766-appb-000005
在另一种设计中,若所述待切换到的SSSG的类型为非空,且上述第一条件为UE接收到用于SSSG切换的DCI信令,则UE可以根据所述DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH,确定所述生效时延。In another design, if the type of the SSSG to be handed over is non-null, and the above first condition is that the UE receives DCI signaling for SSSG handover, the UE can schedule PDSCH or PDSCH according to the DCI. PUSCH, and determine the effective delay.
示例1,若所述DCI用于调度PDSCH,则UE可以根据被调度的PDSCH对应的HARQ 反馈的时间单元偏移,确定所述生效时延。关于时间单元作如下说明:时间单元可以包括无线帧(radio frame)、子帧(subframe)、时隙(slot)、微时隙(mini-slot)或符号(symbol)等时间单位。示例的,一个无线帧可以包括一个或多个子帧,一个子帧可以包括一个或者多个时隙。针对不同的子载波间隔可以有不同的时隙长度。比如子载波间隔为15kHz时,一个时隙可以为1毫秒(ms);子载波间隔为30kHz时,一个时隙可以为0.5ms。一个时隙可以包括一个或多个符号。比如正常循环前缀(cyclic prefix,CP)下一个时隙可以包括14个符号,扩展CP下一个时隙可以包括12个符号。微时隙,又称为迷你时隙,可以是比时隙更小的单位,一个微时隙可以包括一个或多个符号。比如一个微时隙可以包括2个符号,4个符号或7个符号等。一个时隙可以包括一个或多个微时隙。以15kHz的子载波间隔为例,1个无线帧可持续10ms,每个子帧可持续1ms,1个无线帧包括10个子帧,每个时隙持续1ms,每个子帧可包括1个时隙,每个时隙可包括14个符号。进一步的,微时隙可包括4个符号、2个符号或7个符号等。在本申请的后续描述中,以时间单元为时隙,时间单元偏移为时隙偏移为例进行描述的。Example 1, if the DCI is used to schedule the PDSCH, the UE may determine the effective delay according to the time unit offset of the HARQ feedback corresponding to the scheduled PDSCH. The following description is made about the time unit: the time unit may include time units such as radio frame (radio frame), subframe (subframe), time slot (slot), mini-slot (mini-slot) or symbol (symbol). Exemplarily, one radio frame may include one or more subframes, and one subframe may include one or more time slots. There may be different slot lengths for different subcarrier spacings. For example, when the subcarrier spacing is 15kHz, one time slot may be 1 millisecond (ms); when the subcarrier spacing is 30kHz, one time slot may be 0.5ms. A slot can include one or more symbols. For example, the next time slot of a normal cyclic prefix (cyclic prefix, CP) may include 14 symbols, and the next time slot of an extended CP may include 12 symbols. A mini-slot, also known as a mini-slot, can be a smaller unit than a time slot, and a mini-slot can include one or more symbols. For example, a mini-slot may include 2 symbols, 4 symbols or 7 symbols and so on. A time slot may include one or more mini-slots. Taking the subcarrier spacing of 15kHz as an example, a radio frame can last for 10ms, each subframe can last for 1ms, a radio frame includes 10 subframes, each slot lasts 1ms, and each subframe can include 1 slot, Each slot may include 14 symbols. Further, the mini-slot may include 4 symbols, 2 symbols, or 7 symbols, and so on. In the subsequent description of this application, the time unit is a time slot and the time unit offset is a time slot offset as an example for description.
例如,PDSCH与该PDSCH对应的HARQ反馈之间的时隙偏移为K1,则生效时延Y为所述DCI所在时隙与所述HARQ反馈所在时隙之间的时隙偏移,例如,可以表示为K0+K1。关于K0和K1作如下说明:K0指PDCCH与被调度的PDSCH之间的时隙偏移。K1指PDSCH与该PDSCH对应的HARQ反馈之间的时隙偏移。因此,K1与K0的取值之和,即为PDCCH携带的DCI与HARQ反馈的时隙偏移。其中,K1=0表示PDSCH与该PDSCH对应的HARQ反馈在同一个时隙。K1﹥0表示PDSCH与该PDSCH对应的HARQ反馈不在同一个时隙。关于K0取值的介绍,可参见上述。For example, the time slot offset between the PDSCH and the HARQ feedback corresponding to the PDSCH is K1, and the effective delay Y is the time slot offset between the time slot where the DCI is located and the time slot where the HARQ feedback is located, for example, It can be expressed as K0+K1. The following description is made about K0 and K1: K0 refers to the time slot offset between the PDCCH and the scheduled PDSCH. K1 refers to the time slot offset between the PDSCH and the HARQ feedback corresponding to the PDSCH. Therefore, the sum of the values of K1 and K0 is the time slot offset of the DCI carried by the PDCCH and the HARQ feedback. Wherein, K1=0 indicates that the PDSCH and the HARQ corresponding to the PDSCH are fed back in the same time slot. K1>0 indicates that the PDSCH and the HARQ feedback corresponding to the PDSCH are not in the same time slot. For the introduction of the value of K0, please refer to the above.
针对上述示例1,当UE满足所述生效时延时或之后,无论所述HARQ反馈为ACK或NACK,则UE切换到待切换到的SSSG。或者,当UE满足所述生效时延时或之后,当所述HARQ反馈为ACK时,UE切换到待切换到的SSSG。而当HARQ反馈为NACK时,UE不执行切换SSSG。For the above example 1, when the UE meets the effective time delay or later, regardless of whether the HARQ feedback is ACK or NACK, the UE switches to the SSSG to be switched to. Alternatively, when the UE meets the valid time delay or later, when the HARQ feedback is ACK, the UE switches to the SSSG to be switched to. However, when the HARQ feedback is NACK, the UE does not perform handover of the SSSG.
示例2,若DCI用于调度PUSCH,则UE可以根据被调度的PUSCH的时隙偏移,确定所述生效时延。例如,PDCCH与被调度的PUSCH之间的时隙偏移的取值为K2,生效时隙的取值可以等于K2。K2=0表示PDCCH与被调度PUSCH在同一个时隙。K2﹥0,表示PDCCH与被调度PUSCH不在同一个时隙。Example 2, if the DCI is used to schedule the PUSCH, the UE may determine the effective delay according to the time slot offset of the scheduled PUSCH. For example, the value of the time slot offset between the PDCCH and the scheduled PUSCH is K2, and the value of the effective time slot may be equal to K2. K2=0 indicates that the PDCCH and the scheduled PUSCH are in the same time slot. K2>0, indicating that the PDCCH and the scheduled PUSCH are not in the same time slot.
步骤1703:UE根据所述生效时延,切换到上述待切换到的SSSG。Step 1703: The UE switches to the SSSG to be switched to according to the effective delay.
该步骤1703是可选的,UE在满足所述生效时延时或之后,可以切换到上述待切换到的SSSG。或者,在满足所述生效时延时或之后,不切换到上述待切换到的SSSG等,不作限定。比如,在一种设计中,针对DCI调度PDSCH的情况,只有该DCI调度的PDSCH的HARQ反馈为ACK时,再切换SSSG,否则不再切换SSSG等。关于仅在HARQ反馈为ACK时,再执行SSSG切换,而针对HARQ反馈为NACK的时,不再执行SSSG切换,可能考虑以下场景:如果HARQ反馈为NACK,代表UE没有正确译码HARQ反馈对应的PDSCH,基站需要重传PDSCH,不需要切换SSSG。如果HARQ反馈为ACK,代表当前PDSCH传输成功,后续可能没有业务传输,此时可以切换到PDCCH监听时机较稀疏的SSSG。Step 1703 is optional, and the UE may switch to the SSSG to be switched to after a delay or after the validation is satisfied. Alternatively, the switch to the above-mentioned to-be-switched SSSG or the like is not performed after the delay or after the validation is satisfied, which is not limited. For example, in one design, for the DCI-scheduled PDSCH, the SSSG is switched only when the HARQ feedback of the DCI-scheduled PDSCH is ACK, otherwise the SSSG is not switched. Regarding the SSSG handover only performed when the HARQ feedback is ACK, and the SSSG handover is not performed when the HARQ feedback is NACK, the following scenarios may be considered: If the HARQ feedback is NACK, it means that the UE did not correctly decode the corresponding HARQ feedback PDSCH, the base station needs to retransmit the PDSCH, and does not need to switch the SSSG. If the HARQ feedback is ACK, it means that the current PDSCH transmission is successful, and there may be no subsequent service transmission. At this time, you can switch to the SSSG with sparse PDCCH monitoring opportunities.
通过上述实施例三的方案,考虑待切换到的SSSG的类型,确定待切换到的SSSG的不同生效时延,满足不同场景的需求。Through the solution of the third embodiment, the type of the SSSG to be switched to is considered, and different effective delays of the SSSG to be switched to are determined to meet the requirements of different scenarios.
在以上实施例三的描述中,是以UE为执行主体描述上述方案的,上述实施例三的方案,还可以应用于基站侧。例如,在一种设计中,基站可以确定UE待切换到的SSSG;基站根据待切换到的SSSG的类型,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,即生效时延。基站根据所述生效时延,确定UE切换到所述SSSG。之后,基站可以根据UE切换的SSSG,向UE发送PDCCH。In the description of Embodiment 3 above, the above solution is described with the UE as the execution subject. The solution of Embodiment 3 above can also be applied to the base station side. For example, in one design, the base station may determine the SSSG to which the UE is to be handed over; the base station determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG to be handed over, that is, the effective delay. The base station determines that the UE switches to the SSSG according to the effective delay. Afterwards, the base station may send the PDCCH to the UE according to the SSSG handed over by the UE.
可选的,基站可以在满足第二条件时,确定UE待切换到的SSSG。所述第二条件包括:基站向UE发送DCI,该DCI用于指示UE切换到SSSG;或者,基站确定UE根据切换前的SSSG中的SS set发送PDCCH的时长达到第一时长,或者,基站通过切换前的SSSG发送DCI,该DCI可以为任意格式的DCI,或者为协议预定义的DCI格式,例如DCI格式0_0、0_1、1_0、1_1、0_2、或1_2等中的至少一种。Optionally, the base station may determine the SSSG to which the UE is to be handed over when the second condition is satisfied. The second condition includes: the base station sends DCI to the UE, and the DCI is used to instruct the UE to switch to the SSSG; or, the base station determines that the duration for the UE to send the PDCCH according to the SS set in the SSSG before the switch reaches the first duration, or, the base station passes The SSSG before handover sends DCI, and the DCI may be any format of DCI, or a DCI format predefined by a protocol, such as at least one of DCI formats 0_0, 0_1, 1_0, 1_1, 0_2, or 1_2.
与上述UE侧的方案相似,基站根据待切换到的SSSG的类型,确定所述生效时延的过程可以为:若上述待切换到的SSSG的类型为空SSSG,则基站可以根据第一子载波间隔与时间参数的对应关系,确定所述生效时延,所述时间参数用于确定所述生效时延。可选的,上述第一子载波间隔可以为UE激活的BWP的子载波间隔。或者,所述生效时延为协议预定义的或者基站为UE配置的等,不作限定。Similar to the solution on the UE side above, the process of determining the effective delay according to the type of the SSSG to be switched to by the base station may be: if the type of the SSSG to be switched to is an empty SSSG, the base station can The corresponding relationship between the interval and the time parameter determines the effective delay, and the time parameter is used to determine the effective delay. Optionally, the foregoing first subcarrier interval may be the subcarrier interval of the BWP activated by the UE. Alternatively, the effective delay is predefined by the protocol or configured by the base station for the UE, etc., which is not limited.
示例的,关于基站如何根据第一子载波间隔与时间参数的对应关系,确定所述生效时延,作如下说明:在一种设计中,所述生效时延的值等于第一子载波间隔对应的时间参数,或者,所述生效时延的值是根据所述第一子载波间隔对应的时间参数所确定的。例如,可以对第一子载波间隔对应的时间参数,进行不同子载波间隔的变换,得到所述生效时延等。在另一种设计中,所述生效时延的值可以为第一子载波间隔对应的时间参数,与基站确定的用于调度PDSCH的最小调度偏移值,两者中的较大值。或者,上述生效时延是根据上述两者中的较大值所确定的。例如,可以对上述两者中的较大值,进行不同子载波间隔的变换,得到所述生效时延等。As an example, how the base station determines the effective delay according to the corresponding relationship between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter is as follows: In one design, the value of the effective delay is equal to the corresponding value of the first subcarrier interval. or, the value of the effective delay is determined according to the time parameter corresponding to the first subcarrier interval. For example, the time parameter corresponding to the first subcarrier interval may be transformed with different subcarrier intervals to obtain the effective delay and the like. In another design, the value of the effective delay may be the larger value of the time parameter corresponding to the first subcarrier interval and the minimum scheduling offset value determined by the base station for scheduling the PDSCH. Or, the above-mentioned effective delay is determined according to the larger value of the above two. For example, the larger value of the above two can be converted into different subcarrier intervals to obtain the effective delay and the like.
若上述待切换到的SSSG的类型为非空SSSG,若上述第二条件为基站向UE发送DCI,则基站可以根据该DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH,确定所述这生效时延。例如,基站可以根据PDSCH对应的HARQ反馈的时隙偏移,确定所述生效时延。或者,可以根据被调度的PUSCH的时隙偏移,确定所述生效时延等。If the type of the SSSG to be switched to is a non-null SSSG, and if the second condition is that the base station sends DCI to the UE, the base station can determine the effective delay according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI. For example, the base station may determine the effective delay according to the time slot offset of the HARQ feedback corresponding to the PDSCH. Alternatively, the effective delay and the like may be determined according to the time slot offset of the scheduled PUSCH.
之后,在满足所述生效时延时或之后,无论基站接收到的UE的HARQ反馈为ACK或NACK,基站可以确定UE可以均切换到上述待切换到的SSSG。或者,在满足所述生效时延时或之后,仅当基站接收到的UE的HARQ反馈为ACK时,基站可以确定UE切换到上述待切换到的SSSG;否则基站可以确定UE未切换到上述待切换到的SSSG等。Afterwards, the base station can determine that the UE can switch to the SSSG to be switched to regardless of whether the HARQ feedback of the UE received by the base station is ACK or NACK after the time delay when the effective time is satisfied. Or, after satisfying the said effective time delay or after, only when the HARQ feedback of the UE received by the base station is ACK, the base station can determine that the UE switches to the above-mentioned SSSG to be switched to; otherwise, the base station can determine that the UE does not switch to the above-mentioned pending SSSG Switch to SSSG etc.
针对上述介绍的节省UE功耗的方案,在上述方案5)中的增强方案二中,UE执行SSSG切换和跳过PDCCH监听的生效时延方式是一致的。这样同样会存在问题,对于跳过PDCCH监听,基站或UE是希望生效时延越小越好的,而对于SSSG切换,基站或UE可能会考虑其它因素。因此,如何根据SSSG切换或跳过PDCCH监听的类型不同,确定对应的生效时延,是本申请实施例待解决的问题。For the above-mentioned solution for saving power consumption of the UE, in the enhanced solution 2 in the above-mentioned solution 5), the effective delay modes of the UE performing SSSG handover and skipping PDCCH monitoring are consistent. There is also a problem in this way. For skipping PDCCH monitoring, the base station or UE hopes that the effective delay should be as small as possible. For SSSG handover, the base station or UE may consider other factors. Therefore, how to determine the corresponding effective delay according to different types of SSSG handover or skip PDCCH monitoring is a problem to be solved in the embodiment of the present application.
实施例四。Example four.
该实施例四提供一种通信方法,包括:UE可以接收来自基站的DCI,该DCI用于指示SSSSG切换或跳过PDCCH监听。若当DCI用于指示SSSG切换时,可以根据该DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH,确定所述生效时延,可参见上述实施例三中,当SSSG类型为非空时,确定生效时延的方式。或者,当DCI用于指示跳过PDCCH监听时,则可以根据第一子载波间隔和时间参数的对应关系,确定所述生效时延,或者所述生效时延为协议预定义的,或者基站配置的值,可参见上述实施三中,当SSSG类型为空时,确定生效时延的方式。与上述实施例三不同的是,在实施例三中,当满足生效时延时或之后,UE切换到空SSSG。而在该实施例四中,如图18所示,当满足生效时延时或之后,UE停止监听PDCCH。The fourth embodiment provides a communication method, including: the UE can receive DCI from the base station, where the DCI is used to instruct the SSSSG to switch or skip PDCCH monitoring. If the DCI is used to instruct the SSSG handover, the effective delay can be determined according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI. Refer to the third embodiment above. When the SSSG type is non-null, the effective delay is determined. Alternatively, when the DCI is used to indicate skipping PDCCH monitoring, the effective delay may be determined according to the corresponding relationship between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, or the effective delay may be predefined by the protocol or configured by the base station For the value of , please refer to the third implementation above. When the SSSG type is empty, the method of determining the effective delay is determined. The difference from the third embodiment above is that in the third embodiment, the UE switches to the empty SSSG when the time delay or after the valid time is satisfied. However, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18 , the UE stops monitoring the PDCCH when the time delay or after the valid time is satisfied.
通过上述方案,SSSG切换和停止监听PDCCH的生效时延时考虑不同的影响因素,采用不同的方式,确定生效时延,从而可满足各种场景的需求。Through the above solution, the effective delay of SSSG switching and stopping monitoring of PDCCH considers different influencing factors, and adopts different methods to determine the effective delay, so as to meet the needs of various scenarios.
在上述描述中,是以上述方案应用于UE侧为例进行描述的。该方案可同样应用于基站侧。例如,基站向UE发送DCI。当该DCI用于指示SSSG切换时,基站可以根据该DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH,确定生效时延。当基站满足上述生效时延,且切换到的SSSG非空时,基站可以根据切换到的SSSG,向UE发送PDCCH。或者,当DCI用于指示跳过PDCCH监听时,则基站可以根据第一子载波间隔与时间参数的对应关系,或者协议预定义等方式,确定生效时延。当基站满足上述生效时延时或之后,基站可以不再向UE发送PDCCH。相应的,UE在满足上述生效时延时或之后,也不再监听PDCCH,从而节省基站和UE的功耗等。In the above description, the above solution is applied to the UE side as an example for description. This solution can also be applied to the base station side. For example, the base station sends DCI to the UE. When the DCI is used to instruct the SSSG handover, the base station may determine the effective delay according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI. When the base station satisfies the above-mentioned effective delay and the SSSG to which it is handed over is not empty, the base station may send the PDCCH to the UE according to the SSSG to which it is handed over. Alternatively, when the DCI is used to indicate skipping PDCCH monitoring, the base station may determine the effective delay according to the corresponding relationship between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, or by means of protocol pre-definition. When the base station satisfies the above-mentioned effective time delay or after, the base station may no longer send the PDCCH to the UE. Correspondingly, the UE does not monitor the PDCCH after the delay or after the above-mentioned validation is satisfied, thereby saving the power consumption of the base station and the UE.
针对上述实施例一至实施例四,需要说明的是:For the above-mentioned Embodiments 1 to 4, it should be noted that:
1、上文侧重描述了实施例一至实施例四的区别之处,除区别之外的其它内容,不同实施例间可相互参见。1. The above focuses on describing the differences between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. For other content except the difference, reference can be made to each other between the different embodiments.
2、实施例一至实施例四所描述的各个流程中所示意的步骤并非全部是必须执行的步骤,可以根据实际需要在各个流程的基础上添加或删除部分步骤,比如,上述步骤1300、步骤1500和步骤1700等可以选择性执行。2. Not all of the steps shown in the processes described in Embodiments 1 to 4 are mandatory steps, and some steps may be added or deleted on the basis of each process according to actual needs, for example, the above steps 1300 and 1500 and step 1700 etc. can be selectively performed.
3、在上述实施例一至实施例四的描述中,为了便于说明,执行主体直接利用UE和基站为例进行描述。可以理解的是,UE可以替换为终端设备,基站可以替换为网络设备。而关于终端设备和网络设备的说明,可参见上述图1中的说明。3. In the description of the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment, for the convenience of description, the execution subject directly uses the UE and the base station as an example for description. It can be understood that the UE can be replaced by a terminal device, and the base station can be replaced by a network device. For the description of the terminal device and the network device, reference may be made to the description in FIG. 1 above.
以上结合图1、图2a至图2d、图3至图18详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法,以下结合图19至21详细说明本申请实施例提供的装置。应理解,装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应。因此,装置部分未详细描述的内容可参见上文方法实施例中的描述。The method provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail above with reference to FIGS. 1 , 2 a to 2 d , and FIG. 3 to FIG. 18 , and the device provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21 . It should be understood that the description of the apparatus embodiment corresponds to the description of the method embodiment. Therefore, for the content not described in detail in the device part, reference may be made to the descriptions in the above method embodiments.
图19示出了本申请实施例所涉及的装置的可能的框图。如图19所示,装置1900可以包括:通信单元1901用于支持装置与其他设备的通信。可选的,通信单元1901也称为收发单元,可以包括接收单元和/或发送单元,分别用于执行接收和发送操作。处理单元1902用于支持装置进行处理。可选的,装置1900还可以包括存储单元1903,用于存储装置1900的程序代码和/或数据。FIG. 19 shows a possible block diagram of the apparatus involved in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 19 , the apparatus 1900 may include: a communication unit 1901 for supporting the communication between the apparatus and other devices. Optionally, the communication unit 1901 is also referred to as a transceiver unit, and may include a receiving unit and/or a sending unit, which are respectively configured to perform receiving and sending operations. The processing unit 1902 is used to support the device to perform processing. Optionally, the apparatus 1900 may further include a storage unit 1903 for storing program codes and/or data of the apparatus 1900 .
在第一个实施例中,上述装置可以为终端设备或终端设备中的芯片或电路。通信单元 1901用于执行上文方法实施例一中UE的收发操作;处理单元1902用于执行上文方法实施一中UE的处理相关操作。In the first embodiment, the above apparatus may be a terminal device or a chip or circuit in the terminal device. The communication unit 1901 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations of the UE in the first method embodiment above; the processing unit 1902 is configured to perform the processing related operations of the UE in the first method embodiment above.
处理单元1902,用于在第一非连续接收DRX周期的激活时间,工作在第一搜索空间集组SSSG;处理单元1902,还用于在所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始至所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间内用于监听唤醒信号WUS的时间之前,由所述第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。The processing unit 1902 is configured to work in the first search space set group SSSG during the activation time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to start from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the The first SSSG switches to the second SSSG before the time for monitoring the wake-up signal WUS in the inactive time of the first DRX cycle.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元1902,还用于:所述第二SSSG中包括用于监听WUS的搜索空间集,在所述第一DRX的非激活时间,根据所述搜索空间集,监听所述WUS。In a possible design, the processing unit 1902 is further configured to: the second SSSG includes a search space set for monitoring WUS, and at the inactive time of the first DRX, according to the search space set, Monitor the WUS.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二SSSG为协议定义的,或者网络设备配置的。In a possible design, the second SSSG is defined by a protocol or configured by a network device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二SSSG包括仅用于监听所述WUS的搜索空间集。In one possible design, the second SSSG includes a set of search spaces only for listening to the WUS.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1901,用于接收来自网络设备的配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置至少一个SSSG;处理单元1902,用于确定所述第二SSSG,所确定的所述第二SSSG属于所述至少一个SSSG。In a possible design, the communication unit 1901 is configured to receive configuration information from a network device, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG; the processing unit 1902 is configured to determine the second SSSG, the determined The second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
在第二个实施例中,上述装置可以为网络设备或网络设备中的芯片或电路。通信单元1901用于执行上文方法实施例一中基站的收发操作;处理单元1902用于执行上文方法实施例一中基站的处理相关操作。In the second embodiment, the above apparatus may be a network device or a chip or circuit in the network device. The communication unit 1901 is configured to perform the transceiving operations of the base station in the first method embodiment above; the processing unit 1902 is configured to perform the processing related operations of the base station in the first method embodiment above.
例如,处理单元1902,用于在第一非连续接收DRX周期的激活时间,确定终端设备工作在第一搜索空间集组SSSG;处理单元1902,还用于在所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始至所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间内用于监听唤醒信号WUS的时间之前,确定终端设备由所述第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。For example, the processing unit 1902 is configured to, at the activation time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle, determine that the terminal device works in the first search space set group SSSG; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to deactivate the first DRX cycle It is determined that the terminal device is switched from the first SSSG to the second SSSG from the start of time to the time for monitoring the wake-up signal WUS within the inactive time of the first DRX cycle.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元1902,还用于:所述第二SSSG中包括用于监听WUS的搜索空间集,在所述第一DRX的非激活时间,根据所述搜索空间集,发送所述WUS。In a possible design, the processing unit 1902 is further configured to: the second SSSG includes a search space set for monitoring WUS, and at the inactive time of the first DRX, according to the search space set, Send the WUS.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二SSSG为协议定义的,或者,所述网络设备确定的。In a possible design, the second SSSG is defined by a protocol, or determined by the network device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二SSSG中包括仅用于监听WUS的搜索空间集。In a possible design, the second SSSG includes a search space set only for monitoring WUS.
在一种可能的设计中,通信单元1901,还用于向所述终端设备发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置至少一个SSSG,所述第二SSSG属于所述至少一个SSSG。In a possible design, the communication unit 1901 is further configured to send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG, and the second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
在第三个实施例中,上述装置可以为终端设备或终端设备中的芯片或电路。通信单元1901用于执行上文方法实施例二中UE的收发操作;处理单元1902用于执行上文方法实施二中UE的处理相关操作。In the third embodiment, the above apparatus may be a terminal device or a chip or circuit in the terminal device. The communication unit 1901 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations of the UE in the second method embodiment above; the processing unit 1902 is configured to perform the processing related operations of the UE in the second method embodiment above.
例如,通信单元1901,用于执行上述实施例二中的接收用于监听WUS的搜索空间集的配置信息,该搜索空间集的配置信息中包括用于确定SSSG的配置信息,或者,不包括用于确定所述SSSG的配置信息;处理单元1902,用于执行上述实施例二中的在第一DRX周期的非激活时间内,终端设备工作于任一SSSG,根据所述搜索空间集,监听所述WUS。For example, the communication unit 1901 is configured to receive the configuration information of the search space set used for monitoring the WUS in the second embodiment above, where the configuration information of the search space set includes the configuration information for determining the SSSG, or does not include the configuration information for determining the SSSG. is used to determine the configuration information of the SSSG; the processing unit 1902 is configured to execute the inactive time of the first DRX cycle in the above-mentioned embodiment 2, the terminal device works in any SSSG, and monitors all the SSSGs according to the search space set. described WUS.
在第四个实施例中,上述装置可以为终端设备或终端设备中的芯片或电路。通信单元1901用于执行上文方法实施例三中UE的收发操作;处理单元1902用于执行上文方法实施三中UE的处理相关操作。In the fourth embodiment, the above apparatus may be a terminal device or a chip or circuit in the terminal device. The communication unit 1901 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations of the UE in the third method embodiment above; the processing unit 1902 is configured to perform the UE processing related operations in the third method embodiment above.
处理单元1902,用于确定待切换到的搜索空间集组SSSG;处理单元1902,还用于根 据所述SSSG的类型,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,所述SSSG的类型包括空SSSG或非空SSSG,所述空SSSG指所述SSSG中不存在物理下行控制信道PDCCH监听时机或候选PDCCH;处理单元1902,还用于根据所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,切换到所述SSSG。The processing unit 1902 is configured to determine the search space set group SSSG to be switched to; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to determine the time required for switching to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, where the type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG, the empty SSSG means that there is no physical downlink control channel PDCCH monitoring opportunity or candidate PDCCH in the SSSG; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to switch to the desired SSSG according to the time required for switching to the SSSG described SSSG.
在一种可能的设计中,在满足第一条件时,终端设备确定待切换到的SSSG,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是指所述终端设备满足所述第一条件的时间与所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG时间的间隔;In a possible design, when the first condition is satisfied, the terminal device determines the SSSG to be switched to, and the time required for switching to the SSSG refers to the difference between the time when the terminal device satisfies the first condition and the time required to switch to the SSSG. the interval at which the terminal device switches to the SSSG time;
其中,所述第一条件包括:所述终端设备接收到来自网络设备的下行控制信息DCI,该DCI用于指示所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,所述终端设备根据切换前的SSSG中的搜索空间集监听PDCCH的时长达到第一时长;或者,所述终端设备根据切换前的SSSG中的搜索空间集监听到DCI。The first condition includes: the terminal device receives downlink control information DCI from the network device, where the DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or, the terminal device according to the SSSG before switching The duration of monitoring the PDCCH in the search space set in the SSSG reaches the first duration; or, the terminal device monitors the DCI according to the search space set in the SSSG before handover.
在一种可能的设计中,所述根据所述SSSG的类型,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:所述SSSG的类型为非空SSSG,所述第一条件为所述终端设备接收到来自网络设备的DCI,根据所述DCI调度的物理下行共享信道PDSCH或物理上行共享信道PUSCH,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者所述SSSG的类型为空SSSG,根据第一子载波间隔与时间参数的对应关系,确定所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,或者,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间为协议预定义的或者网络设备配置的。In a possible design, determining the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG includes: the type of the SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, and the first condition is that the terminal equipment After receiving the DCI from the network device, determine the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH scheduled by the DCI; or the type of the SSSG is empty SSSG, according to the first The corresponding relationship between the subcarrier interval and the time parameter determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG, or the time required for the handover to the SSSG is predefined by a protocol or configured by a network device.
在一种可能的设计中,根据所述DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:根据所述PDSCH对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈的时隙偏移,确定所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者,根据被调度的所述PUSCH的时隙偏移,确定所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间。In a possible design, determining the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI includes: according to the time slot offset fed back by the HARQ corresponding to the PDSCH, the HARQ, determining the time required for the handover to the SSSG; or, determining the time required for the handover to the SSSG according to the scheduled time slot offset of the PUSCH.
在一种可能的设计中,所述根据所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,切换到所述SSSG,包括:在满足所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,无论所述HARQ反馈为肯定确认或否定确认,切换到所述SSSG;或者,在满足所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时,当所述HARQ反馈为肯定确认时或之后,切换到所述SSSG。In a possible design, the switching to the SSSG according to the time required for switching to the SSSG includes: when the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied or after the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied, regardless of the time required for switching to the SSSG. If the HARQ feedback is a positive acknowledgment or a negative acknowledgment, switch to the SSSG; or, when the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied, when the HARQ feedback is a positive acknowledgment or after, switch to the SSSG .
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一子载波间隔为所述终端设备满足所述第一条件时激活的带宽部分BWP的子载波间隔。In a possible design, the first subcarrier spacing is the subcarrier spacing of the bandwidth part BWP activated when the terminal device satisfies the first condition.
在一种可能的设计中,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数确定的;或者,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数与所述网络设备指示的用于调度PDSCH的最小调度偏移值两者中的较大值确定的。In a possible design, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter; or, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter and the It is determined by the larger value of the minimum scheduling offset value indicated by the network device for scheduling the PDSCH.
在第五个实施例中,上述装置可以为网络设备或网络设备中的芯片或电路。通信单元1901用于执行上文方法实施例三中基站的收发操作;处理单元1902用于执行上文方法实施例三中基站的处理相关操作。In the fifth embodiment, the above apparatus may be a network device or a chip or circuit in the network device. The communication unit 1901 is configured to perform the transceiving operations of the base station in the third method embodiment above; the processing unit 1902 is configured to perform the processing related operations of the base station in the third method embodiment above.
例如,处理单元1902,用于确定终端设备待切换到的搜索空间集组SSSG;处理单元1902,还用于根据所述SSSG的类型,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,所述SSSG的类型包括空SSSG或非空SSSG,所述空SSSG指所述SSSG中不存在物理下行控制信道PDCCH监听时机或候选PDCCH;处理单元1902,还用于根据所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG。For example, the processing unit 1902 is configured to determine the search space set group SSSG to which the terminal device is to be switched; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to determine the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, The type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG, and the empty SSSG means that there is no physical downlink control channel PDCCH monitoring opportunity or candidate PDCCH in the SSSG; the processing unit 1902 is further configured to switch to the selected PDCCH according to the terminal equipment. According to the time required by the SSSG, it is determined that the terminal device switches to the SSSG.
在一种可能的设计中,在满足第二条件时,网络设备确定所述终端设备待切换到的 SSSG,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是指所述终端设备满足所述第二条件的时间与所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG时间的间隔;In a possible design, when the second condition is satisfied, the network device determines the SSSG to which the terminal device is to be handed over, and the time required to switch to the SSSG means that the terminal device satisfies the second condition. The interval between the time of the condition and the time when the terminal device switches to the SSSG;
其中,所述第二条件包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送下行控制信息DCI,所述DCI用于指示所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备根据切换前的SSSG中的搜索空间集监听PDCCH的时长达到第一时长;或者,所述网络设备通过切换前的SSSG发送DCI。The second condition includes: the network device sends downlink control information DCI to the terminal device, where the DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or, the network device determines that the terminal device The duration that the device monitors the PDCCH according to the search space set in the SSSG before the handover reaches the first duration; or, the network device sends the DCI through the SSSG before the handover.
在一种可能的设计中,所述根据所述SSSG的类型,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:所述SSSG的类型为非空SSSG,所述第二条件为所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送DCI,根据所述DCI调度的物理下行共享信道PDSCH或物理上行共享信道PUSCH,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者,所述SSSG的类型为空SSSG,根据第一子载波间隔与时间参数的对应关系,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,所述时间参数用于确定所述切换到所述SSSG的时间;或者,所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间为协议预定义的或者网络设备确定的。In a possible design, determining the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG includes: the type of the SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, and the second condition is: The network device sends DCI to the terminal device, and determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH scheduled by the DCI; or, the SSSG The type of the SSSG is empty, and according to the corresponding relationship between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is determined, and the time parameter is used to determine the time to switch to the SSSG. ; or, the time required by the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is predefined by the protocol or determined by the network device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述根据所述DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:根据所述PDSCH对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈的时隙偏移,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者根据被调度的所述PUSCH的时隙偏移,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间。In a possible design, determining the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI includes: HARQ feedback according to the hybrid automatic repeat request corresponding to the PDSCH determine the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or determine the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the scheduled time slot offset of the PUSCH.
在一种可能的设计中,所述根据所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG,包括:在满足所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,无论所述网络设备接收到的来自所述终端设备的HARQ反馈为肯定确定或否定确认,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,在满足所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,当所述网络设备接收到的来自所述终端设备的HARQ反馈为肯定确认时,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG。In a possible design, the determining that the terminal device switches to the SSSG according to the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG includes: satisfying the requirement that the terminal device switches to the SSSG At or after the required time, regardless of whether the HARQ feedback received by the network device from the terminal device is a positive confirmation or a negative confirmation, the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG; At or after the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG, when the HARQ feedback received by the network device from the terminal device is a positive acknowledgment, the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG SSSG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一子载波间隔为所述网络设备满足所述第二条件时所述终端设备激活的带宽部分BWP的子载波间隔。In a possible design, the first subcarrier spacing is the subcarrier spacing of the bandwidth part BWP activated by the terminal device when the network device satisfies the second condition.
在一种可能的设计中,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数确定的;或者,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数与所述网络设备指示的用于调度PDSCH的最小调度偏移值两者中的较大值确定的。In a possible design, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter; or, the time required for switching to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter and the It is determined by the larger value of the minimum scheduling offset value indicated by the network device for scheduling the PDSCH.
图20为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图。如图20所示,该终端设备包括:天线2010、射频部分2020、信号处理部分2030。天线2010与射频部分2020连接。在下行方向上,射频部分2020通过天线2010接收网络设备发送的信息,将网络设备发送的信息发送给信号处理部分2030进行处理。在上行方向上,信号处理部分2030对终端设备的信息进行处理,并发送给射频部分2020,射频部分2020对终端设备的信息进行处理后经过天线2010发送给网络设备。FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 20 , the terminal device includes: an antenna 2010 , a radio frequency part 2020 , and a signal processing part 2030 . The antenna 2010 is connected to the radio frequency part 2020 . In the downlink direction, the radio frequency part 2020 receives the information sent by the network device through the antenna 2010, and sends the information sent by the network device to the signal processing part 2030 for processing. In the uplink direction, the signal processing part 2030 processes the information of the terminal equipment and sends it to the radio frequency part 2020, and the radio frequency part 2020 processes the information of the terminal equipment and sends it to the network equipment through the antenna 2010.
信号处理部分2030可以包括调制解调子系统,用于实现对数据各通信协议层的处理;还可以包括中央处理子系统,用于实现对终端设备操作系统以及应用层的处理;此外,还可以包括其它子系统,例如多媒体子系统,周边子系统等,其中多媒体子系统用于实现对终端设备相机,屏幕显示等的控制,周边子系统用于实现与其它设备的连接。调制解调子系统可以为单独设置的芯片。The signal processing part 2030 can include a modulation and demodulation subsystem, which is used to implement the processing of each communication protocol layer of the data; it can also include a central processing subsystem, which is used to implement the processing of the terminal device operating system and the application layer; in addition, it can also Including other subsystems, such as multimedia subsystem, peripheral subsystem, etc., wherein the multimedia subsystem is used to realize the control of the terminal equipment camera, screen display, etc., and the peripheral subsystem is used to realize the connection with other devices. The modem subsystem can be a separate chip.
调制解调子系统可以包括一个或多个处理元件2031,例如,包括一个主控CPU和其它集成电路。此外,该调制解调子系统还可以包括存储元件2032和接口电路2033。存储元件2032用于存储数据和程序,但用于执行以上方法中终端设备所执行的方法的程序可能不存储于该存储元件2032中,而是存储于调制解调子系统之外的存储器中,使用时调制解调子系统加载使用。接口电路2033用于与其它子系统通信。The modem subsystem may include one or more processing elements 2031, including, for example, a host CPU and other integrated circuits. In addition, the modulation and demodulation subsystem may further include a storage element 2032 and an interface circuit 2033 . The storage element 2032 is used for storing data and programs, but the program for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the above method may not be stored in the storage element 2032, but in a memory outside the modulation and demodulation subsystem, When used, the modem subsystem is loaded for use. Interface circuit 2033 is used to communicate with other subsystems.
该调制解调子系统可以通过芯片实现,该芯片包括至少一个处理元件和接口电路,其中处理元件用于执行以上终端设备执行的任一种方法的各个步骤,接口电路用于与其它装置通信。在一种实现中,终端设备实现以上方法中各个步骤的单元可以通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现,例如用于终端设备的装置包括处理元件和存储元件,处理元件调用存储元件存储的程序,以执行以上方法实施例中终端设备执行的方法。存储元件可以为与处理元件处于同一芯片上的存储元件,即片内存储元件。The modulation and demodulation subsystem can be implemented by a chip, the chip includes at least one processing element and an interface circuit, wherein the processing element is used to execute each step of any one of the methods performed by the above terminal equipment, and the interface circuit is used to communicate with other devices. In one implementation, the unit for the terminal device to implement each step in the above method may be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler. For example, an apparatus for a terminal device includes a processing element and a storage element, and the processing element calls the program stored in the storage element to Execute the method executed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments. The storage element may be a storage element on the same chip as the processing element, ie, an on-chip storage element.
在另一种实现中,用于执行以上方法中终端设备所执行的方法的程序可以在与处理元件处于不同芯片上的存储元件,即片外存储元件。此时,处理元件从片外存储元件调用或加载程序于片内存储元件上,以调用并执行以上方法实施例中终端设备执行的方法。In another implementation, the program for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the above method may be in a storage element on a different chip from the processing element, that is, an off-chip storage element. At this time, the processing element calls or loads the program from the off-chip storage element to the on-chip storage element, so as to call and execute the method performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
在又一种实现中,终端设备实现以上方法中各个步骤的单元可以是被配置成一个或多个处理元件,这些处理元件设置于调制解调子系统上,这里的处理元件可以为集成电路,例如:一个或多个ASIC,或,一个或多个DSP,或,一个或者多个FPGA,或者这些类集成电路的组合。这些集成电路可以集成在一起,构成芯片。In yet another implementation, the unit for the terminal device to implement each step in the above method may be configured as one or more processing elements, and these processing elements are provided on the modulation and demodulation subsystem, and the processing element here may be an integrated circuit, For example: one or more ASICs, or, one or more DSPs, or, one or more FPGAs, or a combination of these types of integrated circuits. These integrated circuits can be integrated together to form chips.
终端设备实现以上方法中各个步骤的单元可以集成在一起,以SOC的形式实现,该SOC芯片,用于实现以上方法。该芯片内可以集成至少一个处理元件和存储元件,由处理元件调用存储元件的存储的程序的形式实现以上终端设备执行的方法;或者,该芯片内可以集成至少一个集成电路,用于实现以上终端设备执行的方法;或者,可以结合以上实现方式,部分单元的功能通过处理元件调用程序的形式实现,部分单元的功能通过集成电路的形式实现。The units of the terminal device implementing each step in the above method may be integrated together and implemented in the form of an SOC, and the SOC chip is used to implement the above method. At least one processing element and a storage element may be integrated in the chip, and the method executed by the above terminal device may be implemented in the form of a program stored in the storage element being invoked by the processing element; or, at least one integrated circuit may be integrated in the chip to implement the above terminal The method for device execution; or, in combination with the above implementation manners, the functions of some units are implemented in the form of calling programs by processing elements, and the functions of some units are implemented in the form of integrated circuits.
可见,以上用于终端设备的装置可以包括至少一个处理元件和接口电路,其中至少一个处理元件用于执行以上方法实施例所提供的任一种终端设备执行的方法。处理元件可以以第一种方式:即调用存储元件存储的程序的方式执行终端设备执行的部分或全部步骤;也可以以第二种方式:即通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路结合指令的方式执行终端设备执行的部分或全部步骤;当然,也可以结合第一种方式和第二种方式执行终端设备执行的部分或全部步骤。示例性地,处理元件可以是通用处理器,例如CPU,还可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个ASIC,或,一个或多个微处理器DSP,或,一个或者多个FPGA等,或这些集成电路形式中至少两种的组合。存储元件可以是一个存储器,也可以是多个存储器的统称。It can be seen that the above apparatus for a terminal device may include at least one processing element and an interface circuit, where the at least one processing element is configured to execute any method performed by the terminal device provided in the above method embodiments. The processing element can execute part or all of the steps performed by the terminal device in the first way: by calling the program stored in the storage element; or in the second way: by combining the instructions with the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor element Part or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may be performed in the manner of the first method; of course, some or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may also be performed in combination with the first manner and the second manner. Illustratively, the processing element may be a general-purpose processor, such as a CPU, or may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, such as: one or more ASICs, or, one or more microprocessors, DSPs , or, one or more FPGAs, etc., or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms. The storage element can be one memory or a collective term for multiple memories.
参见图21,为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,该网络设备可以为接入网设备(如基站)。接入网设备210可包括一个或多个DU 2101和一个或多个CU 2102。所述DU 2101可以包括至少一个天线21011,至少一个射频单元21012,至少一个处理器21013和至少一个存储器21014。所述DU 2101部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,以及部分基带处理。CU2102可以包括至少一个处理器21022和至少一个存储器21021。Referring to FIG. 21 , which is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, the network device may be an access network device (eg, a base station). Access network equipment 210 may include one or more DUs 2101 and one or more CUs 2102. The DU 2101 may include at least one antenna 21011, at least one radio frequency unit 21012, at least one processor 21013 and at least one memory 21014. The DU 2101 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals, the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, and part of baseband processing. The CU 2102 may include at least one processor 21022 and at least one memory 21021 .
所述CU 2102部分主要用于进行基带处理,对接入网设备进行控制等。所述DU 2101与CU 2102可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。所述CU 2102为接入网设备的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,主要用于完成基带处理功能。例如所述CU 2102可以用于控制接入网设备执行上述方法实施例中关于接入网设备的操作流程。The CU 2102 part is mainly used for baseband processing, control of access network equipment, etc. The DU 2101 and the CU 2102 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station. The CU 2102 is the control center of the access network equipment, which can also be called a processing unit, and is mainly used to complete the baseband processing function. For example, the CU 2102 may be used to control the access network device to perform the operation flow of the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
此外,可选的,接入网设备210可以包括一个或多个射频单元,一个或多个DU和一个或多个CU。其中,DU可以包括至少一个处理器21013和至少一个存储器21014,射频单元可以包括至少一个天线21011和至少一个射频单元21012,CU可以包括至少一个处理器21022和至少一个存储器21021。In addition, optionally, the access network device 210 may include one or more radio frequency units, one or more DUs, and one or more CUs. The DU may include at least one processor 21013 and at least one memory 21014 , the radio unit may include at least one antenna 21011 and at least one radio frequency unit 21012 , and the CU may include at least one processor 21022 and at least one memory 21021 .
应理解以上述装置中单元的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分,实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上,也可以物理上分开。且装置中的单元可以全部以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现;也可以全部以硬件的形式实现;还可以部分单元以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现,部分单元以硬件的形式实现。It should be understood that the division of units in the above apparatus is only a division of logical functions, and in actual implementation, all or part of them may be integrated into a physical entity, or may be physically separated. And all the units in the device can be realized in the form of software calling through the processing element; also can all be realized in the form of hardware; some units can also be realized in the form of software calling through the processing element, and some units can be realized in the form of hardware.
在一个例子中,以上任一装置中的单元可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个特定集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或,一个或多个微处理器(digital singnal processor,DSP),或,一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),或这些集成电路形式中至少两种的组合。再如,当装置中的单元可以通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现时,该处理元件可以是处理器,比如通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),或其它可以调用程序的处理器。再如,这些单元可以集成在一起,以片上系统(system-on-a-chip,SOC)的形式实现。In one example, a unit in any of the above apparatuses may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, eg, one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or, one or more Multiple microprocessors (digital singnal processors, DSPs), or, one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms. For another example, when a unit in the apparatus can be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler, the processing element can be a processor, such as a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), or other processors that can invoke programs. For another example, these units can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
以上用于接收的单元是一种该装置的接口电路,用于从其它装置接收信号。例如,当该装置以芯片的方式实现时,该接收单元是该芯片用于从其它芯片或装置接收信号的接口电路。以上用于发送的单元是一种该装置的接口电路,用于向其它装置发送信号。例如,当该装置以芯片的方式实现时,该发送单元是该芯片用于向其它芯片或装置发送信号的接口电路。The above unit for receiving is an interface circuit of the device for receiving signals from other devices. For example, when the device is implemented in the form of a chip, the receiving unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices. The above unit for sending is an interface circuit of the device for sending signals to other devices. For example, when the device is implemented in the form of a chip, the sending unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices.
本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如“A,B或C中的至少一个”包括A,B,C,AB,AC,BC或ABC。以及,除非有特别说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度等。The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably. "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or", which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are an "or" relationship. "At least one item(s) below" or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s). For example "at least one of A, B or C" includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC. And, unless otherwise specified, ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects degree, etc.
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。As will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, the embodiments of the present application may be provided as a method, a system, or a computer program product. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including, but not limited to, disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
本申请是参照根据本申请的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/ 或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present application is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems), and computer program products according to the present application. It will be understood that each flow and/or block in the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, and combinations of flows and/or blocks in the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, can be implemented by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions may be provided to the processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine such that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing device produce Means for implementing the functions specified in a flow or flow of a flowchart and/or a block or blocks of a block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory result in an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions The apparatus implements the functions specified in the flow or flow of the flowcharts and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions can also be loaded on a computer or other programmable data processing device to cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process such that The instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in the flow or blocks of the flowcharts and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (30)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    在第一非连续接收DRX周期的激活时间,终端设备工作在第一搜索空间集组SSSG;At the activation time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle, the terminal device works in the first search space set group SSSG;
    在所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始至所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间内用于监听唤醒信号WUS的时间之前,所述终端设备由所述第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。The terminal device is switched from the first SSSG to the second SSSG before the inactive time of the first DRX cycle starts to the time for monitoring the wake-up signal WUS within the inactive time of the first DRX cycle.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第二SSSG中包括用于监听WUS的搜索空间集,在所述第一DRX的非激活时间,所述终端设备根据所述搜索空间集,监听所述WUS。The second SSSG includes a search space set for monitoring the WUS. During the inactive time of the first DRX, the terminal device monitors the WUS according to the search space set.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二SSSG为协议定义的,或者网络设备配置的。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second SSSG is defined by a protocol or configured by a network device.
  4. 如权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二SSSG包括仅用于监听所述WUS的搜索空间集。The method of any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the second SSSG includes a set of search spaces used only for listening to the WUS.
  5. 如权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置至少一个SSSG;The terminal device receives configuration information from the network device, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG;
    所述终端设备确定所述第二SSSG,所确定的所述第二SSSG属于所述至少一个SSSG。The terminal device determines the second SSSG, and the determined second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
  6. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    在第一非连续接收DRX周期的激活时间,网络设备确定终端设备工作在第一搜索空间集组SSSG;At the activation time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle, the network device determines that the terminal device works in the first search space set group SSSG;
    在所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间开始至所述第一DRX周期的非激活时间内用于监听唤醒信号WUS的时间之前,所述网络设备确定终端设备由所述第一SSSG切换到第二SSSG。The network device determines that the terminal device is switched from the first SSSG to the first SSSG before the time for monitoring the wake-up signal WUS from the inactive time of the first DRX cycle to the inactive time of the first DRX cycle. 2 SSSG.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第二SSSG中包括用于监听WUS的搜索空间集,在所述第一DRX的非激活时间,所述网络设备根据所述搜索空间集,发送所述WUS。The second SSSG includes a search space set for monitoring WUS, and the network device sends the WUS according to the search space set at the inactive time of the first DRX.
  8. 如权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二SSSG为协议定义的,或者,所述网络设备确定的。The method according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the second SSSG is defined by a protocol or determined by the network device.
  9. 如权利要求6至8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二SSSG中包括仅用于监听WUS的搜索空间集。The method according to any one of claims 6 to 8, wherein the second SSSG includes a search space set only for monitoring WUS.
  10. 如权利要求6至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 6 to 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置至少一个SSSG,所述第二SSSG属于所述至少一个SSSG。The network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to configure at least one SSSG, and the second SSSG belongs to the at least one SSSG.
  11. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于监听唤醒信号WUS的搜索空间集的配置信息,所述搜索空间集的配置信息中包括用于确定搜索空间集组SSSG的配置信息,或者,所述搜索空间集的配置信息不包括用于确定所述SSSG的配置信息;The terminal device receives the configuration information of the search space set used for monitoring the wake-up signal WUS from the network device, where the configuration information of the search space set includes configuration information used to determine the search space set group SSSG, or, the search space set The configuration information does not include the configuration information used to determine the SSSG;
    在第一非连续接收DRX周期的非激活时间内,所述终端设备工作于任一SSSG,所述终端设备根据所述搜索空间集,监听所述WUS。During the inactive time of the first discontinuous reception DRX cycle, the terminal device works in any SSSG, and the terminal device monitors the WUS according to the search space set.
  12. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    终端设备确定待切换到的搜索空间集组SSSG;The terminal device determines the search space set group SSSG to be switched to;
    所述终端设备根据所述SSSG的类型,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,所述SSSG的类型包括空SSSG或非空SSSG,所述空SSSG指所述SSSG中不存在物理下行控制信道PDCCH监听时机或候选PDCCH;The terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, where the type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG, and the empty SSSG means that there is no physical downlink control channel in the SSSG PDCCH listening opportunity or candidate PDCCH;
    所述终端设备根据所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,切换到所述SSSG。The terminal device switches to the SSSG according to the time required for switching to the SSSG.
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,在满足第一条件时,所述终端设备确定待切换到的SSSG,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是指所述终端设备满足所述第一条件的时间与所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG时间的间隔;The method according to claim 12, wherein, when the first condition is satisfied, the terminal device determines the SSSG to be switched to, and the time required for switching to the SSSG means that the terminal device satisfies all requirements. the interval between the time of the first condition and the time when the terminal device switches to the SSSG;
    其中,所述第一条件包括:所述终端设备接收到来自网络设备的下行控制信息DCI,该DCI用于指示所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,所述终端设备根据切换前的SSSG中的搜索空间集监听PDCCH的时长达到第一时长;或者,所述终端设备根据切换前的SSSG中的搜索空间集监听到DCI。The first condition includes: the terminal device receives downlink control information DCI from the network device, where the DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or, the terminal device according to the SSSG before switching The duration of monitoring the PDCCH in the search space set in the SSSG reaches the first duration; or, the terminal device monitors the DCI according to the search space set in the SSSG before handover.
  14. 如权利要求12或13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述SSSG的类型,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:The method according to claim 12 or 13, wherein the terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG, comprising:
    所述SSSG的类型为非空SSSG,所述第一条件为所述终端设备接收到来自网络设备的DCI,所述终端设备根据所述DCI调度的物理下行共享信道PDSCH或物理上行共享信道PUSCH,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者The type of the SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, and the first condition is that the terminal device receives the DCI from the network device, and the terminal device schedules the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH according to the DCI, determine the time required to switch to the SSSG; or
    所述SSSG的类型为空SSSG,所述终端设备根据第一子载波间隔与时间参数的对应关系,确定所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,或者,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间为协议预定义的或者网络设备配置的。The type of the SSSG is an empty SSSG, and the terminal device determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG according to the correspondence between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, or the time required for the handover to the SSSG The time is predefined by the protocol or configured by the network device.
  15. 如权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH,确定切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:The method according to claim 14, wherein the terminal device determines the time required to switch to the SSSG according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI, comprising:
    所述终端设备根据所述PDSCH对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈的时间单元偏移,确定所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者The terminal device determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG according to the time unit offset of the HARQ feedback corresponding to the PDSCH; or
    所述终端设备根据被调度的所述PUSCH的时间单元偏移,确定所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间。The terminal device determines the time required for the handover to the SSSG according to the scheduled time unit offset of the PUSCH.
  16. 如权利要求12至15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,切换到所述SSSG,包括:The method according to any one of claims 12 to 15, wherein the terminal device switches to the SSSG according to the time required for switching to the SSSG, comprising:
    在满足所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,无论所述HARQ反馈为肯定确认或否定确认,所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,When the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied or after the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied, the terminal device switches to the SSSG regardless of whether the HARQ feedback is a positive acknowledgment or a negative acknowledgment; or,
    在满足所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,当所述HARQ反馈为肯定确认时,所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG。When the time required for switching to the SSSG is satisfied or after the HARQ feedback is a positive acknowledgement, the terminal device switches to the SSSG.
  17. 如权利要求14至16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一子载波间隔为所述终端设备满足所述第一条件时激活的带宽部分BWP的子载波间隔。The method according to any one of claims 14 to 16, wherein the first subcarrier spacing is the subcarrier spacing of the bandwidth part BWP activated when the terminal device satisfies the first condition.
  18. 如权利要求14至17中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数确定的;或者,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数与所述网络设备指示的用于调度PDSCH的最小调度偏移值两者中的较大值确定的。The method according to any one of claims 14 to 17, wherein the time required for the handover to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter; or, the time required for the handover to the SSSG The time is determined according to the larger value of the time parameter and the minimum scheduling offset value for scheduling PDSCH indicated by the network device.
  19. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    网络设备确定终端设备待切换到的搜索空间集组SSSG;The network device determines the search space set group SSSG to which the terminal device is to be switched;
    所述网络设备根据所述SSSG的类型,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的 时间,所述SSSG的类型包括空SSSG或非空SSSG,所述空SSSG指所述SSSG中不存在物理下行控制信道PDCCH监听时机或候选PDCCH;The network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the type of the SSSG. The type of the SSSG includes an empty SSSG or a non-empty SSSG, and the empty SSSG means that the SSSG does not exist in the SSSG. Physical downlink control channel PDCCH listening opportunity or candidate PDCCH;
    所述网络设备根据所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG。The network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG according to the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG.
  20. 如权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,在满足第二条件时,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备待切换到的SSSG,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是指所述终端设备满足所述第二条件的时间与所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG时间的间隔;The method according to claim 19, wherein when the second condition is satisfied, the network device determines the SSSG to which the terminal device is to be switched, and the time required for switching to the SSSG refers to the the interval between the time when the terminal device satisfies the second condition and the time when the terminal device switches to the SSSG;
    其中,所述第二条件包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送下行控制信息DCI,所述DCI用于指示所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备根据切换前的SSSG中的搜索空间集监听PDCCH的时长达到第一时长;或者,所述网络设备通过切换前的SSSG发送DCI。The second condition includes: the network device sends downlink control information DCI to the terminal device, where the DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or, the network device determines that the terminal device The duration of monitoring the PDCCH by the device according to the search space set in the SSSG before the handover reaches the first duration; or, the network device sends the DCI through the SSSG before the handover.
  21. 如权利要求19或20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据所述SSSG的类型,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:The method according to claim 19 or 20, wherein, according to the type of the SSSG, the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG, comprising:
    所述SSSG的类型为非空SSSG,所述第二条件为所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送DCI,所述网络设备根据所述DCI调度的物理下行共享信道PDSCH或物理上行共享信道PUSCH,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者,The type of the SSSG is a non-empty SSSG, and the second condition is that the network device sends DCI to the terminal device, and the network device schedules the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH or the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH according to the DCI, determining the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG; or,
    所述SSSG的类型为空SSSG,所述网络设备根据第一子载波间隔与时间参数的对应关系,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,所述时间参数用于确定所述切换到所述SSSG的时间;或者,所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间为协议预定义的或者网络设备确定的。The type of the SSSG is an empty SSSG, and the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the correspondence between the first subcarrier interval and the time parameter, and the time parameter is used to determine the the time for switching to the SSSG; or, the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is predefined by a protocol or determined by a network device.
  22. 如权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据所述DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,包括:The method according to claim 21, wherein the network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the PDSCH or PUSCH scheduled by the DCI, comprising:
    所述网络设备根据所述PDSCH对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈的时间单元偏移,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间;或者The network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the time unit offset of the HARQ feedback corresponding to the PDSCH; or
    所述网络设备根据被调度的所述PUSCH的时间单元偏移,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间。The network device determines the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG according to the scheduled time unit offset of the PUSCH.
  23. 如权利要求19至22中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间,确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG,包括:The method according to any one of claims 19 to 22, wherein the network device determines, according to the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG, to switch the terminal device to the SSSG, comprising: :
    在满足所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,无论所述网络设备接收到的来自所述终端设备的HARQ反馈为肯定确定或否定确认,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG;或者,When or after the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is satisfied, regardless of whether the HARQ feedback received by the network device from the terminal device is a positive confirmation or a negative confirmation, the network device determines that the terminal device The device switches to the SSSG; or,
    在满足所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间时或之后,当所述网络设备接收到的来自所述终端设备的HARQ反馈为肯定确认时,所述网络设备确定所述终端设备切换到所述SSSG。When the time required for the terminal device to switch to the SSSG is satisfied or after the HARQ feedback received by the network device from the terminal device is a positive acknowledgement, the network device determines that the terminal device switches to the SSSG.
  24. 如权利要求21至23中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一子载波间隔为所述网络设备满足所述第二条件时所述终端设备激活的带宽部分BWP的子载波间隔。The method according to any one of claims 21 to 23, wherein the first subcarrier spacing is a subcarrier of a bandwidth part BWP activated by the terminal device when the network device satisfies the second condition interval.
  25. 如权利要求21至24中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数确定的;或者,所述切换到所述SSSG所需要的时间是根据所述时间参数与所述网络设备指示的用于调度PDSCH的最小调度偏移值两者中的较大值确定的。The method according to any one of claims 21 to 24, wherein the time required for the handover to the SSSG is determined according to the time parameter; or, the time required for the handover to the SSSG The time is determined according to the larger value of the time parameter and the minimum scheduling offset value for scheduling PDSCH indicated by the network device.
  26. 一种装置,其特征在于,用于实现权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求11所述的方法,或者权利要求12至18任一项所述的方法。An apparatus, characterized by being used for implementing the method of any one of claims 1 to 5, or the method of claim 11, or the method of any one of claims 12 to 18.
  27. 一种装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器,所述处理器和所述存储器耦合,所述处理器用于实现权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求11所述的方法,或者权利要求12至18任一项所述的方法。An apparatus, characterized in that it comprises a processor and a memory, the processor and the memory are coupled, and the processor is configured to implement the method of any one of claims 1 to 5, or the method of claim 11 method, or a method as claimed in any one of claims 12 to 18.
  28. 一种装置,其特征在于,用于实现权利要求6至10任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求19至25任一项所述的方法。A device, characterized in that, it is used to implement the method of any one of claims 6 to 10, or the method of any one of claims 19 to 25.
  29. 一种装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器,所述处理器和所述存储器耦合,所述处理器用于实现权利要求6至10任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求19至25任一项所述的方法。An apparatus, characterized in that it comprises a processor and a memory, the processor and the memory are coupled, and the processor is configured to implement the method of any one of claims 6 to 10, or any one of claims 19 to 25 one of the methods described.
  30. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求6至10任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求11所述的方法,或者权利要求12至18任一项所述的方法,或者权利要求19至25任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method of any one of claims 1 to 5, or the method of any one of claims 6 to 10 , or the method of claim 11 , or the method of any one of claims 12 to 18 , or the method of any one of claims 19 to 25 .
PCT/CN2022/080766 2021-03-31 2022-03-14 Communication method and apparatus WO2022206363A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110349761.8 2021-03-31
CN202110349761.8A CN115150911A (en) 2021-03-31 2021-03-31 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022206363A1 true WO2022206363A1 (en) 2022-10-06

Family

ID=83403305

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/080766 WO2022206363A1 (en) 2021-03-31 2022-03-14 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115150911A (en)
WO (1) WO2022206363A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110831020A (en) * 2018-08-10 2020-02-21 华为技术有限公司 Method for detecting DCI (Downlink control information), method for configuring PDCCH (physical Downlink control channel) and communication device
WO2020246858A1 (en) * 2019-06-06 2020-12-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for determining of a search space set for physical downlink control channel (pdcch) monitoring

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110831020A (en) * 2018-08-10 2020-02-21 华为技术有限公司 Method for detecting DCI (Downlink control information), method for configuring PDCCH (physical Downlink control channel) and communication device
WO2020246858A1 (en) * 2019-06-06 2020-12-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for determining of a search space set for physical downlink control channel (pdcch) monitoring

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
MODERATOR (LENOVO): "Summary of email discussion [100b-e-NR-unlic-NRU- DL_Signals_and_Channels-01] on SS group sets", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2002786, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20200420 - 20200430, 1 May 2020 (2020-05-01), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051879486 *
MODERATOR (VIVO): "FL summary#1 of power saving for Active Time", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2101893, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20210125 - 20210205, 27 January 2021 (2021-01-27), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051975973 *
VIVO: "Discussion on DCI-based power saving adaptation in connected mode", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2100455, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20210125 - 20210205, 18 January 2021 (2021-01-18), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051970377 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115150911A (en) 2022-10-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11064559B2 (en) Method of sharing a UE receiver between D2D and cellular operations based on activity
US11212747B2 (en) Power saving operations for communication systems
KR101624994B1 (en) Discontinuous reception(drx) reconfiguration
US11265960B2 (en) Methods of reliable paging transmission under UE EDRX
EP2781118B1 (en) Active bandwidth indicator for power-saving user equipment
WO2021204215A1 (en) Drx control method and apparatus
US20220104122A1 (en) Selective Cross-Slot Scheduling for NR User Equipment
KR102442912B1 (en) Wakeup Downlink Control Information (DCI) for Wireless Devices in Connected Mode
WO2020221093A1 (en) Method and apparatus for monitoring and configuring search space
CN113328834A (en) Communication method and device
WO2019028792A1 (en) Resource allocation method and device
WO2020029855A1 (en) Communication method, device and apparatus
WO2023134539A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
US20210243835A1 (en) Early activation of discontinuous reception
WO2021016958A1 (en) Method and apparatus for electrically changing parameter of power saving signal, terminal, and medium
WO2022206363A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2020200119A1 (en) Signal detection method and device
WO2024067292A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting downlink control information
WO2023207568A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024113577A1 (en) Method, device, and system for discontinuous data transmission and reception in wireless networks
WO2022151284A1 (en) Semi-persistent scheduling resource configuration method, and semi-persistent scheduling method and apparatus
WO2023098566A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024093531A1 (en) Communication method and related apparatus
KR20230169148A (en) Methods and devices for sidelink communication
WO2021093965A1 (en) A client device for operation of an inactivity timer

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22778547

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22778547

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1